1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2008-03-17.10} 7% 8% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10% 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 11% 12% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 13% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 14% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 15% License, or (at your option) any later version. 16% 17% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 18% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 19% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 20% General Public License for more details. 21% 22% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 23% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 24% 25% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 26% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 27% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) 28% 29% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 30% reports; you can get the latest version from: 31% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or 32% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex 33% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). 34% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 35% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 36% 37% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 38% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 39% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 40% 41% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 42% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 43% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 44% tex foo.texi 45% texindex foo.?? 46% tex foo.texi 47% tex foo.texi 48% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 49% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 50% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 51% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 52% 53% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 54% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 55% full Texinfo distribution. 56% 57% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 58 59 60\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 61 62% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 63% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 64% they might have appeared in the input file name. 65\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 66 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 67 68 69\chardef\other=12 70 71% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 72% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 73\let\+ = \relax 74 75% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 76\let\ptexb=\b 77\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 78\let\ptexc=\c 79\let\ptexcomma=\, 80\let\ptexdot=\. 81\let\ptexdots=\dots 82\let\ptexend=\end 83\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 84\let\ptexexclam=\! 85\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 86\let\ptexgtr=> 87\let\ptexhat=^ 88\let\ptexi=\i 89\let\ptexindent=\indent 90\let\ptexinsert=\insert 91\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 92\let\ptexless=< 93\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 94\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 95\let\ptexplus=+ 96\let\ptexrbrace=\} 97\let\ptexslash=\/ 98\let\ptexstar=\* 99\let\ptext=\t 100\let\ptextop=\top 101 102% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 103% starts a new line in the output. 104\newlinechar = `^^J 105 106% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 107% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 108% 109\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 110 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 111\else 112 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 113\fi 114 115% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 116\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 117\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 118\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 119\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 120\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 121\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 122\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 123\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 124\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 125\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 126\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 127\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 128\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 129\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 130\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 131\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 132\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 133\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 134\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 135% 136\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 137\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 138\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 139\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 140\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 141\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 142\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 143\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 148% 149\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 150\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 151\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 152\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 153\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 154 155% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. 156\chardef\spacecat = 10 157\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} 158 159% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. 160\chardef\colonChar = `\: 161\chardef\commaChar = `\, 162\chardef\dashChar = `\- 163\chardef\dotChar = `\. 164\chardef\exclamChar= `\! 165\chardef\lquoteChar= `\` 166\chardef\questChar = `\? 167\chardef\rquoteChar= `\' 168\chardef\semiChar = `\; 169\chardef\underChar = `\_ 170 171% Ignore a token. 172% 173\def\gobble#1{} 174 175% The following is used inside several \edef's. 176\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 177 178% Hyphenation fixes. 179\hyphenation{ 180 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 181 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 182 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 183 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 184 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 185 spell-ing spell-ings 186 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 187 wide-spread wrap-around 188} 189 190% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 191\newdimen\bindingoffset 192\newdimen\normaloffset 193\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight 194 195% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 196% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 197% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 198% 199\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} 200 201% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should 202% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the 203% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would 204% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main 205% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). 206% 207\def\|{% 208 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. 209 \leavevmode 210 % 211 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. 212 \vadjust{% 213 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current 214 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. 215 \vskip-\baselineskip 216 % 217 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So 218 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. 219 \llap{% 220 % 221 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. 222 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt 223 % 224 % This is the space between the bar and the text. 225 \hskip 12pt 226 }% 227 }% 228} 229 230% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 231% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 232% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 233% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 234% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 235% 236\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 237\def\loggingall{% 238 \tracingstats2 239 \tracingpages1 240 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 241 \tracingparagraphs1 242 \tracingoutput1 243 \tracingmacros2 244 \tracingrestores1 245 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 246 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging 247 \tracingscantokens1 248 \tracingifs1 249 \tracinggroups1 250 \tracingnesting2 251 \tracingassigns1 252 \fi 253 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 254 \errorcontextlines16 255}% 256 257% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 258% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 259% 260\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 261 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 262\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 263 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 264\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 265 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 266 267% For @cropmarks command. 268% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 269% 270\newif\ifcropmarks 271\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 272% 273% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 274% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 275% 276\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 277\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 278\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 279\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 280 281% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 282% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 283% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 284% 285% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 286% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 287% 288% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 289% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 290% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is 291% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two 292% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and 293% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... 294\def\domark{% 295 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 296 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 297 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 298 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 299 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 300 \mark{% 301 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 302 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 303 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 304 }% 305} 306% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 307% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 308% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 309% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 310% first @chapter. 311\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 312 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 313 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 314} 315\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 316\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 317 318% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 319\def\lastchapterdefs{} 320\def\lastsectiondefs{} 321\def\prevchapterdefs{} 322\def\prevsectiondefs{} 323\def\lastcolordefs{} 324 325% Main output routine. 326\chardef\PAGE = 255 327\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 328 329\newbox\headlinebox 330\newbox\footlinebox 331 332% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents 333% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. 334\def\onepageout#1{% 335 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 336 % 337 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 338 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 339 % 340 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 341 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 342 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 343 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% 344 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 345 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% 346 % 347 {% 348 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 349 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 350 % before the \shipout runs. 351 % 352 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 353 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 354 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 355 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 356 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 357 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 358 % it needs to be 359 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} 360 \shipout\vbox{% 361 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 362 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 363 % 364 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 365 \hsize = \outerhsize 366 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 367 \vtop to0pt{% 368 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 369 \nointerlineskip 370 \line{% 371 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 372 \hfill 373 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 374 }% 375 \vss}% 376 \vskip\topandbottommargin 377 \line\bgroup 378 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 379 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 380 \vbox\bgroup 381 \fi 382 % 383 \unvbox\headlinebox 384 \pagebody{#1}% 385 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 386 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 387 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 388 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 389 \vskip 24pt 390 \unvbox\footlinebox 391 \fi 392 % 393 \ifcropmarks 394 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 395 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 396 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 397 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 398 \vbox to0pt{\vss 399 \line{% 400 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 401 \hfill 402 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 403 }% 404 \nointerlineskip 405 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 406 }% 407 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 408 \fi 409 }% end of \shipout\vbox 410 }% end of group with \indexdummies 411 \advancepageno 412 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 413} 414 415\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 416 417\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 418{\catcode`\@ =11 419\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 420% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 421\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 422 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 423\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 424\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 425\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 426} 427 428% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 429% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 430% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 431% 432\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 433\def\nstop{\vbox 434 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 435\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 436\def\nsbot{\vbox 437 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 438 439% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 440% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 441% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 442% 443\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 444\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 445 \def\argtorun{#2}% 446 \begingroup 447 \obeylines 448 \spaceisspace 449 #1% 450 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 451} 452 453{\obeylines % 454 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 455 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 456 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 457 }% 458} 459 460% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. 461\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 462\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 463 464% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 465% 466% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 467% @end itemize @c foo 468% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 469% by \finishparsearg. 470% 471\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 472\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 473\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 474 \def\temp{#3}% 475 \ifx\temp\empty 476 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 477 \let\temp\finishparsearg 478 \else 479 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 480 \fi 481 % Put the space token in: 482 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 483} 484 485% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 486% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 487% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 488% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 489% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 490% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 491% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 492% 493% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 494% 495\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 496 497% \parseargdef\foo{...} 498% is roughly equivalent to 499% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 500% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 501% 502% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my 503% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 504 505\def\parseargdef#1{% 506 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 507} 508\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 509 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 510 \def#1##1% 511} 512 513% Several utility definitions with active space: 514{ 515 \obeyspaces 516 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 517 518 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 519 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 520 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 521 % should produce a line of output anyway. 522 % 523 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 524 525 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 526 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 527 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 528 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 529} 530 531 532\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 533 534% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 535% 536% \envdef\foo{...} 537% \def\Efoo{...} 538% 539% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 540% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 541% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 542% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 543% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 544% 545% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 546% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The 547% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 548% special case.) 549 550 551% At runtime, environments start with this: 552\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 553% initialize 554\let\thisenv\empty 555 556% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 557\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 558\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 559 560% Check whether we're in the right environment: 561\def\checkenv#1{% 562 \def\temp{#1}% 563 \ifx\thisenv\temp 564 \else 565 \badenverr 566 \fi 567} 568 569% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected: 570\def\badenverr{% 571 \errhelp = \EMsimple 572 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 573 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 574} 575\def\inenvironment#1{% 576 \ifx#1\empty 577 out of any environment% 578 \else 579 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 580 \fi 581} 582 583% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 584% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 585% 586\parseargdef\end{% 587 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 588 \else 589 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 590 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 591 \csname E#1\endcsname 592 \endgroup 593 \fi 594} 595 596\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 597 598 599%% Simple single-character @ commands 600 601% @@ prints an @ 602% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). 603\def\@{{\tt\char64}} 604 605% This is turned off because it was never documented 606% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. 607%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' 608%% but suppressing ligatures. 609%\def\`{{`}} 610%\def\'{{'}} 611 612% Used to generate quoted braces. 613\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} 614\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} 615\let\{=\mylbrace 616\let\}=\myrbrace 617\begingroup 618 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, 619 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. 620 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other 621 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 622 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other 623 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% 624 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% 625 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% 626 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% 627!endgroup 628 629% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 630\let\comma = , 631 632% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 633% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 634\let\, = \c 635\let\dotaccent = \. 636\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 637\let\tieaccent = \t 638\let\ubaraccent = \b 639\let\udotaccent = \d 640 641% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 642% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 643\def\questiondown{?`} 644\def\exclamdown{!`} 645\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} 646\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} 647 648% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 649\def\imacro{i} 650\def\jmacro{j} 651\def\dotless#1{% 652 \def\temp{#1}% 653 \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi 654 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j 655 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 656 \fi\fi 657} 658 659% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 660% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 661% 662\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 663 664% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 665% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 666% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 667% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 668% \scriptscriptstyle). 669% 670\def\LaTeX{% 671 L\kern-.36em 672 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 673 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% 674 \kern-.15em 675 \TeX 676} 677 678% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 679% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 680% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 681% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 682% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 683{\catcode`@ = 11 684 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 685 % if the definition is written into an index file. 686 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 687 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 688} 689 690% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 691\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 692 693% @* forces a line break. 694\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 695 696% @/ allows a line break. 697\let\/=\allowbreak 698 699% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 700\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 701 702% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 703\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 704 705% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 706\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 707 708% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 709% 710\def\onword{on} 711\def\offword{off} 712% 713\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 714 \def\temp{#1}% 715 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 716 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 717 \else 718 \errhelp = \EMsimple 719 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% 720 \fi\fi 721} 722 723% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 724% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 725% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 726\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 727 728% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 729% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 730% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 731% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 732% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 733% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 734% the text is small, which looks bad. 735% 736% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 737% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 738% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 739% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 740% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 741% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 742% 743\newbox\groupbox 744\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 745% 746\envdef\group{% 747 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 748 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 749 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 750 \fi 751 \startsavinginserts 752 % 753 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 754 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 755 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 756 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 757 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 758 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 759 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 760 \comment 761} 762% 763% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 764% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 765% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 766% above. But it's pretty close. 767\def\Egroup{% 768 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 769 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 770 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 771 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 772 \egroup % End the \vtop. 773 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 774 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 775 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 776 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 777 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 778 % group, force a page break. 779 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 780 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight 781 \page 782 \fi 783 \fi 784 \box\groupbox 785 \prevdepth = \dimen1 786 \checkinserts 787} 788% 789% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 790% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 791% 792\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 793group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 794where each line of input produces a line of output.} 795 796% @need space-in-mils 797% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 798 799\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 800 801% Old definition--didn't work. 802%\parseargdef\need{\par % 803%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally 804%% if the depth of the box does not fit. 805%{\baselineskip=0pt% 806%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak 807%\prevdepth=-1000pt 808%}} 809 810\parseargdef\need{% 811 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 812 % paragraph. 813 \par 814 % 815 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 816 \dimen0 = #1\mil 817 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 818 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 819 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 820 % 821 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 822 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 823 % And a page break here is fine. 824 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 825 % 826 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 827 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 828 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 829 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 830 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 831 % 832 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 833 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 834 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 835 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 836 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 837 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 838 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 839 \penalty9999 840 % 841 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 842 \kern -#1\mil 843 % 844 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 845 \nobreak 846 \fi 847} 848 849% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 850 851\let\br = \par 852 853% @page forces the start of a new page. 854% 855\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 856 857% @exdent text.... 858% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 859 860% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 861% That's how much \exdent should take out. 862\newskip\exdentamount 863 864% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 865\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 866 867% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 868\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 869 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 870 871% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 872% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 873% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. 874% 875\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 876\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 877% 878\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 879 \nobreak 880 \kern-\strutdepth 881 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 882 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 883 \vss 884 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 885 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 886 \ifx#1l% 887 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 888 \else 889 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 890 \fi 891 \null 892 }% 893}} 894\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 895\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 896% 897% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 898% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 899% else use TEXT for both). 900% 901\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 902\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 903 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 904 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 905 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 906 \def\righttext{#2}% 907 \else 908 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 909 \def\righttext{#1}% 910 \fi 911 % 912 \ifodd\pageno 913 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 914 \else 915 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 916 \fi 917 \temp 918} 919 920% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 921% 922\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 923\def\includezzz#1{% 924 \pushthisfilestack 925 \def\thisfile{#1}% 926 {% 927 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 928 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 929 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 930 % 931 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 932 % definitions, etc. 933 \expandafter 934 }\temp 935 \popthisfilestack 936} 937\def\filenamecatcodes{% 938 \catcode`\\=\other 939 \catcode`~=\other 940 \catcode`^=\other 941 \catcode`_=\other 942 \catcode`|=\other 943 \catcode`<=\other 944 \catcode`>=\other 945 \catcode`+=\other 946 \catcode`-=\other 947} 948 949\def\pushthisfilestack{% 950 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 951} 952\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 953 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 954} 955\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 956 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 957} 958 959\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 960\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 961 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 962 963\def\thisfile{} 964 965% @center line 966% outputs that line, centered. 967% 968\parseargdef\center{% 969 \ifhmode 970 \let\next\centerH 971 \else 972 \let\next\centerV 973 \fi 974 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 975} 976\def\centerH#1{% 977 {% 978 \hfil\break 979 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 980 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 981 \line{#1}% 982 \break 983 }% 984} 985\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} 986 987% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 988 989\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 990 991% @comment ...line which is ignored... 992% @c is the same as @comment 993% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 994 995\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% 996\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 997\commentxxx} 998{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 999 1000\let\c=\comment 1001 1002% @paragraphindent NCHARS 1003% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 1004% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 1005% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 1006% 1007\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 1008\def\noneword{none} 1009% 1010\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 1011 \def\temp{#1}% 1012 \ifx\temp\asisword 1013 \else 1014 \ifx\temp\noneword 1015 \defaultparindent = 0pt 1016 \else 1017 \defaultparindent = #1em 1018 \fi 1019 \fi 1020 \parindent = \defaultparindent 1021} 1022 1023% @exampleindent NCHARS 1024% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 1025% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 1026% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 1027\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 1028 \def\temp{#1}% 1029 \ifx\temp\asisword 1030 \else 1031 \ifx\temp\noneword 1032 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 1033 \else 1034 \lispnarrowing = #1em 1035 \fi 1036 \fi 1037} 1038 1039% @firstparagraphindent WORD 1040% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 1041% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 1042% paragraphs. 1043% 1044% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 1045% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 1046% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 1047% By default, we suppress indentation. 1048% 1049\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 1050\def\insertword{insert} 1051% 1052\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 1053 \def\temp{#1}% 1054 \ifx\temp\noneword 1055 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 1056 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 1057 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 1058 \else 1059 \errhelp = \EMsimple 1060 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 1061 \fi\fi 1062} 1063 1064% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1065% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1066% 1067% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1068% paragraph. 1069% 1070\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1071 \gdef\indent{% 1072 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1073 \indent 1074 }% 1075 \gdef\noindent{% 1076 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1077 \noindent 1078 }% 1079 \global\everypar = {% 1080 \kern -\parindent 1081 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1082 }% 1083} 1084 1085\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1086 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent 1087 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent 1088 \global \everypar = {}% 1089} 1090 1091 1092% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 1093% 1094\def\asis#1{#1} 1095 1096% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 1097% 1098% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 1099% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 1100% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 1101% which is what @var uses. 1102{ 1103 \catcode`\_ = \active 1104 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 1105 \catcode`\_=\active 1106 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 1107 } 1108} 1109% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. 1110% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but 1111% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not 1112% otherwise define @\. 1113% 1114% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 1115\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 1116% 1117\def\math{% 1118 \tex 1119 \mathunderscore 1120 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 1121 \mathactive 1122 $\finishmath 1123} 1124\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 1125 1126% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 1127% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 1128% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 1129% 1130{ 1131 \catcode`^ = \active 1132 \catcode`< = \active 1133 \catcode`> = \active 1134 \catcode`+ = \active 1135 \gdef\mathactive{% 1136 \let^ = \ptexhat 1137 \let< = \ptexless 1138 \let> = \ptexgtr 1139 \let+ = \ptexplus 1140 } 1141} 1142 1143% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. 1144\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} 1145\def\minus{$-$} 1146 1147% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 1148% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 1149% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 1150% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 1151% whichever is larger. 1152% 1153\def\dots{% 1154 \leavevmode 1155 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 1156 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 1157 \dimen0 = \wd0 1158 \else 1159 \dimen0 = 1.5em 1160 \fi 1161 \hbox to \dimen0{% 1162 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 1163 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 1164 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 1165 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 1166 }% 1167} 1168 1169% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 1170% 1171\def\enddots{% 1172 \dots 1173 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 1174} 1175 1176% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up 1177% Texinfo's parsing. 1178% 1179\let\comma = , 1180 1181% @refill is a no-op. 1182\let\refill=\relax 1183 1184% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 1185% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 1186% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). 1187% 1188\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 1189\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 1190 1191% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. 1192% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. 1193% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. 1194\def\setfilename{% 1195 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. 1196 \iflinks 1197 \tryauxfile 1198 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 1199 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 1200 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. 1201 \openindices 1202 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. 1203 % 1204 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 1205 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. 1206 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf 1207 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi 1208 \closein 1 1209 % 1210 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. 1211} 1212 1213% Called from \setfilename. 1214% 1215\def\openindices{% 1216 \newindex{cp}% 1217 \newcodeindex{fn}% 1218 \newcodeindex{vr}% 1219 \newcodeindex{tp}% 1220 \newcodeindex{ky}% 1221 \newcodeindex{pg}% 1222} 1223 1224% @bye. 1225\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1226 1227 1228\message{pdf,} 1229% adobe `portable' document format 1230\newcount\tempnum 1231\newcount\lnkcount 1232\newtoks\filename 1233\newcount\filenamelength 1234\newcount\pgn 1235\newtoks\toksA 1236\newtoks\toksB 1237\newtoks\toksC 1238\newtoks\toksD 1239\newbox\boxA 1240\newcount\countA 1241\newif\ifpdf 1242\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1243 1244% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1245% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, 1246% borrowed from ifpdf.sty. 1247\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined 1248\else 1249 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1250 \else 1251 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1252 \else 1253 \pdftrue 1254 \fi 1255 \fi 1256\fi 1257 1258% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1259% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1260% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1261% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1262% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html 1263% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX 1264% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1265% that's what we do). 1266 1267% double active backslashes. 1268% 1269{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active 1270 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% 1271 @catcode`@\=@active 1272 @let\=@doublebackslash} 1273} 1274 1275% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are 1276% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as 1277% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor 1278% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission 1279% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek. 1280% 1281% #1 is the tokens to replace. 1282% #2 is the replacement. 1283% #3 is the control sequence with the string. 1284% 1285\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% 1286 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% 1287 ##1% 1288 \ifx\\##2\\% 1289 \else 1290 #2% 1291 \HyReturnAfterFi{% 1292 \HyPsdReplace##2\END 1293 }% 1294 \fi 1295 }% 1296 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% 1297} 1298\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} 1299 1300% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. 1301\def\backslashparens#1{% 1302 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply 1303 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. 1304 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% 1305 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% 1306} 1307 1308\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1309with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1310be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1311output) for that.)} 1312 1313\ifpdf 1314 % 1315 % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex. 1316 \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35} 1317 \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1} 1318 % 1319 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k}} 1320 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1321 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1322 \def\setcolor#1{% 1323 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1324 \domark 1325 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1326 } 1327 % 1328 \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack} 1329 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1330 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1331 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1332 % 1333 \def\makefootline{% 1334 \baselineskip24pt 1335 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1336 } 1337 % 1338 \def\makeheadline{% 1339 \vbox to 0pt{% 1340 \vskip-22.5pt 1341 \line{% 1342 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1343 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1344 \getcolormarks 1345 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1346 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1347 }% 1348 \vss 1349 }% 1350 \nointerlineskip 1351 } 1352 % 1353 % 1354 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1355 % 1356 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1357 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1358 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1359 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1360 % 1361 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among 1362 % others). Let's try in that order. 1363 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1364 \begingroup 1365 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1366 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1367 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1368 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1369 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1370 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1371 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1372 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1373 \fi 1374 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1375 \fi 1376 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1377 \fi 1378 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1379 \fi 1380 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1381 \fi 1382 \closein 1 1383 \endgroup 1384 % 1385 % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1386 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1387 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1388 \immediate\pdfimage 1389 \else 1390 \immediate\pdfximage 1391 \fi 1392 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi 1393 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi 1394 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1395 #1.\pdfimgext 1396 \else 1397 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1398 \fi 1399 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1400 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1401 \fi} 1402 % 1403 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% 1404 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1405 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1406 \indexnofonts 1407 \turnoffactive 1408 \activebackslashdouble 1409 \makevalueexpandable 1410 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1411 \backslashparens\pdfdestname 1412 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1413 }} 1414 % 1415 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1416 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1417 % 1418 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as 1419 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. 1420 \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed} 1421 \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed} 1422 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1423 % 1424 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1425 % come from Petr Olsak 1426 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1427 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1428 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1429 \advance\tempnum by 1 1430 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1431 % 1432 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1433 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1434 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1435 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1436 % #4 is the page number 1437 % 1438 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1439 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1440 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1441 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1442 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1443 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1444 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty 1445 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% 1446 \else 1447 % Doubled backslashes in the name. 1448 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1449 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% 1450 \fi 1451 % 1452 % Also double the backslashes in the display string. 1453 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1454 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% 1455 % 1456 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1457 } 1458 % 1459 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1460 \begingroup 1461 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks 1462 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace 1463 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace 1464 % 1465 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1466 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1467 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1468 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1469 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1470 }% 1471 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1472 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1473 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1474 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1475 }% 1476 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1477 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1478 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1479 }% 1480 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1481 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1482 }% 1483 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1484 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1485 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1486 % 1487 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1488 % al. a second time, below. 1489 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1490 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1491 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1492 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1493 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1494 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1495 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1496 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1497 \readdatafile{toc}% 1498 % 1499 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1500 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1501 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1502 % 1503 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1504 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1505 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1506 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1507 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1508 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1509 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1510 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1511 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1512 % 1513 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1514 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1515 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1516 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1517 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1518 % 1519 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1520 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right 1521 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. 1522 \indexnofonts 1523 \setupdatafile 1524 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1525 \input \tocreadfilename 1526 \endgroup 1527 } 1528 % 1529 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1530 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1531 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1532 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1533 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1534 \fi 1535 \fi 1536 \nextsp} 1537 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} 1538 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1539 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1540 \else 1541 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1542 \fi 1543 % make a live url in pdf output. 1544 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1545 \begingroup 1546 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1547 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1548 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1549 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1550 % 1551 \normalturnoffactive 1552 \def\@{@}% 1553 \let\/=\empty 1554 \makevalueexpandable 1555 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1556 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1557 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1558 \endgroup} 1559 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1560 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1561 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1562 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1563 \def\maketoks{% 1564 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1565 \ifx\first0\adn0 1566 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1567 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1568 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1569 \else 1570 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1571 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1572 \let\next=\maketoks 1573 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1574 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1575 \fi 1576 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1577 \next} 1578 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1579 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1580 \def\pdflink#1{% 1581 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1582 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1583 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1584\else 1585 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1586 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1587 \let\endlink = \relax 1588 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1589 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1590 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1591\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1592 1593 1594\message{fonts,} 1595 1596% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 1597% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 1598% italics, not bold italics. 1599% 1600\def\setfontstyle#1{% 1601 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 1602 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font 1603} 1604 1605% Select #1 fonts with the current style. 1606% 1607\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} 1608 1609\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 1610\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 1611\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 1612\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 1613\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 1614 1615% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 1616% So we set up a \sf. 1617\newfam\sffam 1618\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 1619\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. 1620 1621% We don't need math for this font style. 1622\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 1623 1624 1625% Default leading. 1626\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt 1627 1628% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1629% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1630% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1631% 1632\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1633\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1634\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1635% 1636% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1637\def\baselinefactor{1} 1638% 1639\def\setleading#1{% 1640 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1641 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1642 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1643 \normalbaselines 1644 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1645 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1646 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1647 }% 1648} 1649 1650% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1651% 1652% do nothing with this by default. 1653\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1654\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1655\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1656 1657% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1658% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1659% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1660\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else 1661 \begingroup 1662 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1663 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1664%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1665%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1666%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1667%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1668%%Version: 1.000 1669%%EndComments 1670/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 167112 dict begin 1672begincmap 1673/CIDSystemInfo 1674<< /Registry (TeX) 1675/Ordering (OT1) 1676/Supplement 0 1677>> def 1678/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1679/CMapType 2 def 16801 begincodespacerange 1681<00> <7F> 1682endcodespacerange 16838 beginbfrange 1684<00> <01> <0393> 1685<09> <0A> <03A8> 1686<23> <26> <0023> 1687<28> <3B> <0028> 1688<3F> <5B> <003F> 1689<5D> <5E> <005D> 1690<61> <7A> <0061> 1691<7B> <7C> <2013> 1692endbfrange 169340 beginbfchar 1694<02> <0398> 1695<03> <039B> 1696<04> <039E> 1697<05> <03A0> 1698<06> <03A3> 1699<07> <03D2> 1700<08> <03A6> 1701<0B> <00660066> 1702<0C> <00660069> 1703<0D> <0066006C> 1704<0E> <006600660069> 1705<0F> <00660066006C> 1706<10> <0131> 1707<11> <0237> 1708<12> <0060> 1709<13> <00B4> 1710<14> <02C7> 1711<15> <02D8> 1712<16> <00AF> 1713<17> <02DA> 1714<18> <00B8> 1715<19> <00DF> 1716<1A> <00E6> 1717<1B> <0153> 1718<1C> <00F8> 1719<1D> <00C6> 1720<1E> <0152> 1721<1F> <00D8> 1722<21> <0021> 1723<22> <201D> 1724<27> <2019> 1725<3C> <00A1> 1726<3D> <003D> 1727<3E> <00BF> 1728<5C> <201C> 1729<5F> <02D9> 1730<60> <2018> 1731<7D> <02DD> 1732<7E> <007E> 1733<7F> <00A8> 1734endbfchar 1735endcmap 1736CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1737end 1738end 1739%%EndResource 1740%%EOF 1741 }\endgroup 1742 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1743 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1744 }% 1745% 1746% \cmapOT1IT 1747 \begingroup 1748 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1749 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1750%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1751%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1752%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1753%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1754%%Version: 1.000 1755%%EndComments 1756/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 175712 dict begin 1758begincmap 1759/CIDSystemInfo 1760<< /Registry (TeX) 1761/Ordering (OT1IT) 1762/Supplement 0 1763>> def 1764/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1765/CMapType 2 def 17661 begincodespacerange 1767<00> <7F> 1768endcodespacerange 17698 beginbfrange 1770<00> <01> <0393> 1771<09> <0A> <03A8> 1772<25> <26> <0025> 1773<28> <3B> <0028> 1774<3F> <5B> <003F> 1775<5D> <5E> <005D> 1776<61> <7A> <0061> 1777<7B> <7C> <2013> 1778endbfrange 177942 beginbfchar 1780<02> <0398> 1781<03> <039B> 1782<04> <039E> 1783<05> <03A0> 1784<06> <03A3> 1785<07> <03D2> 1786<08> <03A6> 1787<0B> <00660066> 1788<0C> <00660069> 1789<0D> <0066006C> 1790<0E> <006600660069> 1791<0F> <00660066006C> 1792<10> <0131> 1793<11> <0237> 1794<12> <0060> 1795<13> <00B4> 1796<14> <02C7> 1797<15> <02D8> 1798<16> <00AF> 1799<17> <02DA> 1800<18> <00B8> 1801<19> <00DF> 1802<1A> <00E6> 1803<1B> <0153> 1804<1C> <00F8> 1805<1D> <00C6> 1806<1E> <0152> 1807<1F> <00D8> 1808<21> <0021> 1809<22> <201D> 1810<23> <0023> 1811<24> <00A3> 1812<27> <2019> 1813<3C> <00A1> 1814<3D> <003D> 1815<3E> <00BF> 1816<5C> <201C> 1817<5F> <02D9> 1818<60> <2018> 1819<7D> <02DD> 1820<7E> <007E> 1821<7F> <00A8> 1822endbfchar 1823endcmap 1824CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1825end 1826end 1827%%EndResource 1828%%EOF 1829 }\endgroup 1830 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 1831 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1832 }% 1833% 1834% \cmapOT1TT 1835 \begingroup 1836 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1837 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1838%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1839%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1840%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 1841%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 1842%%Version: 1.000 1843%%EndComments 1844/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 184512 dict begin 1846begincmap 1847/CIDSystemInfo 1848<< /Registry (TeX) 1849/Ordering (OT1TT) 1850/Supplement 0 1851>> def 1852/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 1853/CMapType 2 def 18541 begincodespacerange 1855<00> <7F> 1856endcodespacerange 18575 beginbfrange 1858<00> <01> <0393> 1859<09> <0A> <03A8> 1860<21> <26> <0021> 1861<28> <5F> <0028> 1862<61> <7E> <0061> 1863endbfrange 186432 beginbfchar 1865<02> <0398> 1866<03> <039B> 1867<04> <039E> 1868<05> <03A0> 1869<06> <03A3> 1870<07> <03D2> 1871<08> <03A6> 1872<0B> <2191> 1873<0C> <2193> 1874<0D> <0027> 1875<0E> <00A1> 1876<0F> <00BF> 1877<10> <0131> 1878<11> <0237> 1879<12> <0060> 1880<13> <00B4> 1881<14> <02C7> 1882<15> <02D8> 1883<16> <00AF> 1884<17> <02DA> 1885<18> <00B8> 1886<19> <00DF> 1887<1A> <00E6> 1888<1B> <0153> 1889<1C> <00F8> 1890<1D> <00C6> 1891<1E> <0152> 1892<1F> <00D8> 1893<20> <2423> 1894<27> <2019> 1895<60> <2018> 1896<7F> <00A8> 1897endbfchar 1898endcmap 1899CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1900end 1901end 1902%%EndResource 1903%%EOF 1904 }\endgroup 1905 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 1906 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1907 }% 1908\fi\fi 1909 1910 1911% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the 1912% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). 1913% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 1914% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass 1915% empty to omit). 1916\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 1917 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 1918 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 1919} 1920% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 1921\let\cmap\gobble 1922% emacs-page end of cmaps 1923 1924% Use cm as the default font prefix. 1925% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 1926% before you read in texinfo.tex. 1927\ifx\fontprefix\undefined 1928\def\fontprefix{cm} 1929\fi 1930% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 1931\def\rmshape{r} 1932\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold 1933\def\bfshape{b} 1934\def\bxshape{bx} 1935\def\ttshape{tt} 1936\def\ttbshape{tt} 1937\def\ttslshape{sltt} 1938\def\itshape{ti} 1939\def\itbshape{bxti} 1940\def\slshape{sl} 1941\def\slbshape{bxsl} 1942\def\sfshape{ss} 1943\def\sfbshape{ss} 1944\def\scshape{csc} 1945\def\scbshape{csc} 1946 1947% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in 1948% Texinfo. 1949% 1950\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 1951% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 1952\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 1953\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 1954\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1955\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1956\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1957\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1958\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1959\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1960\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1961\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1962\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1963\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1964\def\textecsize{1095} 1965 1966% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1967\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1968\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1969\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1970\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1971 1972% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1973\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1974\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1975\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 1976\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1977\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 1978\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1979\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1980\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1981\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 1982\font\smalli=cmmi9 1983\font\smallsy=cmsy9 1984\def\smallecsize{0900} 1985 1986% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 1987\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 1988\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1989\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 1990\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1991\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 1992\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1993\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1994\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1995\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 1996\font\smalleri=cmmi8 1997\font\smallersy=cmsy8 1998\def\smallerecsize{0800} 1999 2000% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2001\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2002\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2003\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2004\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2005\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2006\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2007\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2008\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2009\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2010\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2011\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2012\def\authorrm{\secrm} 2013\def\authortt{\sectt} 2014\def\titleecsize{2074} 2015 2016% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2017\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2018\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2019\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2020\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2021\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2022\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2023\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2024\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2025\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2026\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2027\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2028\def\chapecsize{1728} 2029 2030% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2031\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2032\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2033\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2034\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2035\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2036\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2037\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2038\let\secbf\secrm 2039\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2040\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2041\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2042\def\sececsize{1440} 2043 2044% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2045\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2046\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2047\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2048\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2049\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2050\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2051\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2052\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2053\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2054\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2055\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2056\def\ssececsize{1200} 2057 2058% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). 2059\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2060\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2061\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2062\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2063\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2064\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2065\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2066\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2067\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2068\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2069\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2070\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2071 2072% reset the current fonts 2073\textfonts 2074\rm 2075} % end of 11pt text font size definitions 2076 2077 2078% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2079% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2080% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2081% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2082% 2083\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2084% Text fonts (10pt). 2085\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2086\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2087\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2088\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2089\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2090\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2091\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2092\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2093\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2094\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2095\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2096\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2097\def\textecsize{1000} 2098 2099% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2100\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2101\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2102\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2103\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 2104 2105% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2106\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2107\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2108\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2109\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2110\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2111\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2112\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2113\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2114\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2115\font\smalli=cmmi9 2116\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2117\def\smallecsize{0900} 2118 2119% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2120\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2121\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2122\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2123\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2124\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2125\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2126\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2127\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2128\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2129\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2130\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2131\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2132 2133% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2134\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2135\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2136\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2137\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2138\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2139\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2140\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2141\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2142\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2143\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2144\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2145\def\authorrm{\secrm} 2146\def\authortt{\sectt} 2147\def\titleecsize{2074} 2148 2149% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2150\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2151\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2152\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2153\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2154\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2155\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2156\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2157\let\chapbf\chaprm 2158\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2159\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2160\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2161\def\chapecsize{1440} 2162 2163% Section fonts (12pt). 2164\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2165\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2166\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2167\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2168\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2169\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2170\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2171\let\secbf\secrm 2172\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2173\font\seci=cmmi12 2174\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2175\def\sececsize{1200} 2176 2177% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2178\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2179\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2180\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2181\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2182\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2183\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2184\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2185\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2186\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2187\font\sseci=cmmi10 2188\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2189\def\ssececsize{1000} 2190 2191% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). 2192\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2193\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2194\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2195\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2196\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2197\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2198\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2199\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2200\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2201\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2202\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2203\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2204 2205% reduce space between paragraphs 2206\divide\parskip by 2 2207 2208% reset the current fonts 2209\textfonts 2210\rm 2211} % end of 10pt text font size definitions 2212 2213 2214% We provide the user-level command 2215% @fonttextsize 10 2216% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2217% 2218\def\xword{10} 2219\def\xiword{11} 2220% 2221\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2222 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2223 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2224 % 2225 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2226 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2227 % 2228 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2229 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2230 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2231 \else 2232 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2233 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2234 \fi\fi 2235 \endgroup 2236} 2237 2238 2239% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2240% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since 2241% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except 2242% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and 2243% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). 2244% 2245\def\resetmathfonts{% 2246 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy 2247 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf 2248 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf 2249} 2250 2251% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead 2252% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the 2253% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire 2254% \tenSTYLE to set the current font. 2255% 2256% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2257% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in 2258% the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2259% 2260% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2261% 2262\def\textfonts{% 2263 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl 2264 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc 2265 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy 2266 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl 2267 \def\curfontsize{text}% 2268 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2269 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} 2270\def\titlefonts{% 2271 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl 2272 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc 2273 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy 2274 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl 2275 \def\curfontsize{title}% 2276 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% 2277 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} 2278\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2279\def\chapfonts{% 2280 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl 2281 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc 2282 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy 2283 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl 2284 \def\curfontsize{chap}% 2285 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% 2286 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} 2287\def\secfonts{% 2288 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl 2289 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc 2290 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy 2291 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl 2292 \def\curfontsize{sec}% 2293 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% 2294 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} 2295\def\subsecfonts{% 2296 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl 2297 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc 2298 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy 2299 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl 2300 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% 2301 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% 2302 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} 2303\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts 2304\def\reducedfonts{% 2305 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl 2306 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc 2307 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy 2308 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl 2309 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% 2310 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2311 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2312\def\smallfonts{% 2313 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl 2314 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc 2315 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy 2316 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl 2317 \def\curfontsize{small}% 2318 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2319 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2320\def\smallerfonts{% 2321 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl 2322 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc 2323 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy 2324 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl 2325 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% 2326 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2327 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} 2328 2329% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2330\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2331 2332% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2333% can fit this many characters: 2334% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2335% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2336% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2337% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2338% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2339% 2340% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2341% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2342% 2343% I wish the USA used A4 paper. 2344% --karl, 24jan03. 2345 2346 2347% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2348% 2349\definetextfontsizexi 2350 2351% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2352\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2353\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2354 2355% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2356\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2357 2358% Fonts for short table of contents. 2359\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2360\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2361\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2362\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2363 2364%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans 2365%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic 2366 2367% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction 2368% unless the following character is such as not to need one. 2369\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else 2370 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} 2371\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2372\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2373 2374% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. 2375% @var is set to this for defun arguments. 2376\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2377 2378% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2379% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2380\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2381 2382\let\i=\smartitalic 2383\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2384\let\var=\smartslanted 2385\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2386\let\emph=\smartitalic 2387 2388% @b, explicit bold. 2389\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2390\let\strong=\b 2391 2392% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2393\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2394 2395% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2396% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2397% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2398% 2399\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2400\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2401 2402% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2403% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2404% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2405% 2406\catcode`@=11 2407 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2408 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m 2409 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m 2410 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2411 } 2412 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2413 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2414 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2415 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2416 } 2417\catcode`@=\other 2418\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2419 2420\def\t#1{% 2421 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2422 \null 2423} 2424\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} 2425\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2426\font\keysy=cmsy9 2427\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 2428 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 2429 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 2430 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 2431 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 2432 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 2433\def\key #1{{\nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} 2434% The old definition, with no lozenge: 2435%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} 2436\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} 2437 2438% @file, @option are the same as @samp. 2439\let\file=\samp 2440\let\option=\samp 2441 2442% @code is a modification of @t, 2443% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. 2444\def\tclose#1{% 2445 {% 2446 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2447 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2448 % 2449 % Switch to typewriter. 2450 \tt 2451 % 2452 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2453 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2454 % 2455 % Turn off hyphenation. 2456 \nohyphenation 2457 % 2458 \rawbackslash 2459 \plainfrenchspacing 2460 #1% 2461 }% 2462 \null 2463} 2464 2465% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2466% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2467% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2468 2469% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2470% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2471% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2472% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. 2473% -- rms. 2474{ 2475 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2476 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2477 % 2478 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2479 \catcode\rquoteChar=\active \catcode\lquoteChar=\active 2480 \let'\codequoteright \let`\codequoteleft 2481 % 2482 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2483 \ifallowcodebreaks 2484 \let-\codedash 2485 \let_\codeunder 2486 \else 2487 \let-\realdash 2488 \let_\realunder 2489 \fi 2490 \codex 2491 } 2492} 2493 2494\def\realdash{-} 2495\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} 2496\def\codeunder{% 2497 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2498 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2499 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2500 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2501 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2502 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2503 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2504 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2505 {\_}% 2506} 2507\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2508 2509% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2510% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in 2511% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in 2512% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. 2513% 2514\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2515 2516\def\keywordtrue{true} 2517\def\keywordfalse{false} 2518 2519\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2520 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2521 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2522 \allowcodebreakstrue 2523 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2524 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2525 \else 2526 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2527 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% 2528 \fi\fi 2529} 2530 2531% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 2532% then @kbd has no effect. 2533 2534% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 2535% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 2536% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 2537\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 2538 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2539 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 2540 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 2541 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 2542 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2543 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 2544 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2545 \else 2546 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2547 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% 2548 \fi\fi\fi 2549} 2550\def\worddistinct{distinct} 2551\def\wordexample{example} 2552\def\wordcode{code} 2553 2554% Default is `distinct.' 2555\kbdinputstyle distinct 2556 2557\def\xkey{\key} 2558\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 2559\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 2560\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi 2561\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} 2562 2563% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. 2564\let\indicateurl=\code 2565\let\env=\code 2566\let\command=\code 2567 2568% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 2569\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 2570 2571% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 2572\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 2573\def\click{\arrow} 2574 2575% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) 2576% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third 2577% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url 2578% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in 2579% a hypertex \special here. 2580% 2581\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} 2582\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup 2583 \unsepspaces 2584 \pdfurl{#1}% 2585 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2586 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2587 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2588 \else 2589 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2590 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2591 \ifpdf 2592 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it 2593 \else 2594 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url 2595 \fi 2596 \else 2597 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it 2598 \fi 2599 \fi 2600 \endlink 2601\endgroup} 2602 2603% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 2604% 2605\let\url=\uref 2606 2607% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 2608% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 2609% 2610%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 2611\ifpdf 2612 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 2613 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 2614 \unsepspaces 2615 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 2616 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2617 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 2618 \endlink 2619 \endgroup} 2620\else 2621 \let\email=\uref 2622\fi 2623 2624% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2625% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2626% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2627% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2628% 2629\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2630 2631% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 2632% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 2633% 2634\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 2635 2636\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} 2637 2638% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', 2639% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for 2640% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. 2641%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} 2642 2643% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2644\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2645\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2646\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2647 2648% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 2649% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 2650% all-uppercase. 2651% 2652\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 2653\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2654 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% 2655 \def\temp{#2}% 2656 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2657 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2658 \fi 2659} 2660 2661% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 2662% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 2663% 2664\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 2665\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2666 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2667 \def\temp{#2}% 2668 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2669 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2670 \fi 2671} 2672 2673% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 2674% 2675\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 2676 2677% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 2678% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 2679% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 2680% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 2681% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 2682% 2683% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 2684% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 2685% font height. 2686% 2687% feymr - regular 2688% feymo - slanted 2689% feybr - bold 2690% feybo - bold slanted 2691% 2692% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 2693% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 2694% Hmm. 2695% 2696% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 2697% Hope not. 2698% 2699% 2700\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 2701\def\eurofont{% 2702 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 2703 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 2704 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 2705 % font installed. 2706 % 2707 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 2708 % that to the current nominal size. 2709 % 2710 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 2711 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 2712 % 2713 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2714 % 2715 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2716 % bold: 2717 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 2718 \else 2719 % regular: 2720 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 2721 \fi 2722 \thiseurofont 2723} 2724 2725% Hacks for glyphs from the EC fonts similar to \euro. We don't 2726% use \let for the aliases, because sometimes we redefine the original 2727% macro, and the alias should reflect the redefinition. 2728\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 2729\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 2730\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 2731\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 2732\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 2733\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 2734\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 2735\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 2736% 2737\def\ecfont{% 2738 % We can't distinguish serif/sanserif and italic/slanted, but this 2739 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 2740 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 2741 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 2742 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 2743 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2744 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2745 % bold: 2746 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 2747 \else 2748 % regular: 2749 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 2750 \fi 2751 \thisecfont 2752} 2753 2754% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 2755% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 2756% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 2757% 2758\def\registeredsymbol{% 2759 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% 2760 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 2761 }$% 2762} 2763 2764% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 2765% 2766\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 2767 2768% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 2769% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 2770% so we'll define it if necessary. 2771% 2772\ifx\Orb\undefined 2773\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 2774\fi 2775 2776% Quotes. 2777\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 2778\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 2779\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 2780\chardef\quoteright=`\' 2781 2782 2783\message{page headings,} 2784 2785\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 2786\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 2787 2788% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 2789\newif\ifseenauthor 2790\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 2791 2792% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the 2793% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. 2794% 2795\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 2796 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 2797\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 2798 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 2799 2800\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 2801 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 2802 2803\envdef\titlepage{% 2804 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 2805 \begingroup 2806 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 2807 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 2808 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 2809 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 2810 \finishedtitlepagetrue 2811 % 2812 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 2813 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 2814 \let\oldpage = \page 2815 \def\page{% 2816 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 2817 \finishtitlepage 2818 \fi 2819 \let\page = \oldpage 2820 \page 2821 \null 2822 }% 2823} 2824 2825\def\Etitlepage{% 2826 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 2827 \finishtitlepage 2828 \fi 2829 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 2830 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 2831 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 2832 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 2833 \oldpage 2834 \endgroup 2835 % 2836 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 2837 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 2838 \HEADINGSon 2839 % 2840 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. 2841 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 2842 \shortcontents 2843 \contents 2844 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 2845 \global\let\contents = \relax 2846 \fi 2847 % 2848 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 2849 \contents 2850 \global\let\contents = \relax 2851 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 2852 \fi 2853} 2854 2855\def\finishtitlepage{% 2856 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 2857 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 2858 \finishedtitlepagetrue 2859} 2860 2861%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 2862 2863\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm 2864\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 2865 2866\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines 2867 \let\tt=\authortt} 2868 2869\parseargdef\title{% 2870 \checkenv\titlepage 2871 \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} 2872 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 2873 \finishedtitlepagefalse 2874 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 2875} 2876 2877\parseargdef\subtitle{% 2878 \checkenv\titlepage 2879 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 2880} 2881 2882% @author should come last, but may come many times. 2883% It can also be used inside @quotation. 2884% 2885\parseargdef\author{% 2886 \def\temp{\quotation}% 2887 \ifx\thisenv\temp 2888 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 2889 \else 2890 \checkenv\titlepage 2891 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 2892 {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% 2893 \fi 2894} 2895 2896 2897%%% Set up page headings and footings. 2898 2899\let\thispage=\folio 2900 2901\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 2902\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 2903\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 2904\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 2905 2906% Now make TeX use those variables 2907\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 2908 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 2909\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 2910 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 2911\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 2912 2913% Commands to set those variables. 2914% For example, this is what @headings on does 2915% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 2916% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 2917% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 2918% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 2919 2920 2921\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 2922\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2923\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2924\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2925 2926\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 2927\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2928\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2929\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2930 2931\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 2932 2933\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 2934\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2935\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2936\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2937 2938\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 2939\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2940\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2941 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 2942 % 2943 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 2944 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 2945 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt 2946 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 2947} 2948 2949\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 2950 2951% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 2952% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 2953% 2954% The same set of arguments for: 2955% 2956% @oddheadingmarks 2957% @evenfootingmarks 2958% @oddfootingmarks 2959% @everyheadingmarks 2960% @everyfootingmarks 2961 2962\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 2963\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 2964\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 2965\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 2966\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 2967 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 2968\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 2969 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 2970% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 2971\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 2972 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 2973 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 2974} 2975 2976\everyheadingmarks bottom 2977\everyfootingmarks bottom 2978 2979% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 2980% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 2981% @headings off turns them off. 2982% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 2983% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 2984% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 2985% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 2986% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 2987% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 2988 2989\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 2990 2991\def\HEADINGSoff{% 2992\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 2993\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} 2994\HEADINGSoff 2995% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 2996% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 2997% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 2998% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 2999% edge of all pages. 3000\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3001\global\pageno=1 3002\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3003\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3004\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3005\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3006\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3007} 3008\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3009 3010% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3011% page number on top right. 3012\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3013\global\pageno=1 3014\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3015\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3016\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3017\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3018\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3019} 3020\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3021 3022\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3023\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3024\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3025\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3026\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3027\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3028\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3029\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3030} 3031 3032\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3033\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3034\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3035\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3036\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3037\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3038\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3039} 3040 3041% Subroutines used in generating headings 3042% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3043% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3044% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3045\ifx\today\undefined 3046\def\today{% 3047 \number\day\space 3048 \ifcase\month 3049 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3050 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3051 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3052 \fi 3053 \space\number\year} 3054\fi 3055 3056% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3057% It generates no output of its own. 3058\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3059\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3060 3061 3062\message{tables,} 3063% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3064 3065% default indentation of table text 3066\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3067% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3068\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3069% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3070\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3071 3072% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3073\newdimen\itemmax 3074 3075% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3076% these defs. 3077% They also define \itemindex 3078% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3079 3080\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3081 3082\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3083 3084\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3085\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3086 3087\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3088 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3089 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3090 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3091 \itemindex{#1}% 3092 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3093 % 3094 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3095 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3096 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3097 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3098 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3099 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3100 % 3101 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3102 % but leave it ragged-right. 3103 \begingroup 3104 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3105 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3106 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil 3107 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3108 \endgroup 3109 % 3110 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 3111 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 3112 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 3113 % 3114 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 3115 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 3116 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 3117 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 3118 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 3119 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 3120 % 3121 \penalty 10001 3122 \endgroup 3123 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 3124 \else 3125 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 3126 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 3127 \noindent 3128 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 3129 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 3130 % eventually be printed. 3131 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 3132 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 3133 \unhbox0 3134 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 3135 \endgroup 3136 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 3137 \fi 3138} 3139 3140\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 3141\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 3142 3143% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 3144\envdef\table{% 3145 \let\itemindex\gobble 3146 \tablecheck{table}% 3147} 3148\envdef\ftable{% 3149 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 3150 \tablecheck{ftable}% 3151} 3152\envdef\vtable{% 3153 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 3154 \tablecheck{vtable}% 3155} 3156\def\tablecheck#1{% 3157 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 3158 \endgroup 3159 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 3160 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 3161 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 3162 \else 3163 \let\next\tablex 3164 \fi 3165 \next 3166} 3167\def\tablex#1{% 3168 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 3169 \parsearg\tabley 3170} 3171\def\tabley#1{% 3172 {% 3173 \makevalueexpandable 3174 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 3175 \expandafter 3176 }\temp \endtablez 3177} 3178\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 3179 \aboveenvbreak 3180 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 3181 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 3182 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 3183 \itemmax=\tableindent 3184 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 3185 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 3186 \exdentamount=\tableindent 3187 \parindent = 0pt 3188 \parskip = \smallskipamount 3189 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3190 \let\item = \internalBitem 3191 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 3192} 3193\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 3194\let\Eftable\Etable 3195\let\Evtable\Etable 3196\let\Eitemize\Etable 3197\let\Eenumerate\Etable 3198 3199% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 3200 3201\newcount \itemno 3202 3203\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 3204 3205\def\doitemize#1{% 3206 \aboveenvbreak 3207 \itemmax=\itemindent 3208 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 3209 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 3210 \exdentamount=\itemindent 3211 \parindent=0pt 3212 \parskip=\smallskipamount 3213 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3214 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 3215 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 3216 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 3217 \let\item=\itemizeitem 3218} 3219 3220% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 3221% 3222\def\itemizeitem{% 3223 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 3224 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 3225 {% 3226 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 3227 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 3228 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 3229 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 3230 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 3231 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 3232 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 3233 % that's the theory. 3234 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 3235 \noindent 3236 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 3237 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. 3238 \flushcr 3239} 3240 3241% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 3242% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 3243% 3244\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 3245 3246% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 3247% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 3248% argument is the same as `1'. 3249% 3250\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 3251\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 3252 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 3253 \def\thearg{#1}% 3254 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 3255 % 3256 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 3257 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 3258 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 3259 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 3260 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 3261 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 3262 \ifx\rest\empty 3263 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 3264 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 3265 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 3266 % not equal to itself. 3267 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 3268 % 3269 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 3270 % continuing to look for a <number>. 3271 % 3272 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 3273 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 3274 \else 3275 % It's a letter. 3276 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 3277 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 3278 \else 3279 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 3280 \fi 3281 \fi 3282 \else 3283 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 3284 \numericenumerate 3285 \fi 3286} 3287 3288% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 3289% given in \thearg. 3290% 3291\def\numericenumerate{% 3292 \itemno = \thearg 3293 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 3294} 3295 3296% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 3297\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 3298 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3299 \startenumeration{% 3300 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3301 \ifnum\itemno=0 3302 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3303 alphabet}% 3304 \fi 3305 \char\lccode\itemno 3306 }% 3307} 3308 3309% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 3310\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 3311 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3312 \startenumeration{% 3313 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3314 \ifnum\itemno=0 3315 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3316 alphabet} 3317 \fi 3318 \char\uccode\itemno 3319 }% 3320} 3321 3322% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 3323% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 3324% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 3325% 3326\def\startenumeration#1{% 3327 \advance\itemno by -1 3328 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 3329} 3330 3331% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 3332% to @enumerate. 3333% 3334\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 3335\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 3336\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3337\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3338 3339 3340% @multitable macros 3341% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 3342% 3343% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 3344% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 3345% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 3346% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 3347 3348% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 3349 3350% To make preamble: 3351% 3352% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 3353% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 3354% @item ... 3355% 3356% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 3357% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 3358% columns as desired. 3359 3360 3361% Or use a template: 3362% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3363% @item ... 3364% using the widest term desired in each column. 3365 3366% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 3367% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 3368% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 3369% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 3370 3371% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 3372% if they are. 3373 3374% Sample multitable: 3375 3376% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3377% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 3378% @item 3379% first col stuff 3380% @tab 3381% second col stuff 3382% @tab 3383% third col 3384% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 3385% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 3386% 3387% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 3388% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 3389% @end multitable 3390 3391% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 3392% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 3393% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 3394% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 3395% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 3396% to baseline. 3397% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 3398% 3399\newskip\multitableparskip 3400\newskip\multitableparindent 3401\newdimen\multitablecolspace 3402\newskip\multitablelinespace 3403\multitableparskip=0pt 3404\multitableparindent=6pt 3405\multitablecolspace=12pt 3406\multitablelinespace=0pt 3407 3408% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 3409% 3410\let\endsetuptable\relax 3411\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 3412\let\columnfractions\relax 3413\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 3414\newif\ifsetpercent 3415 3416% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 3417% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 3418% 3419\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 3420 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3421 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 3422 \setuptable 3423} 3424 3425\newcount\colcount 3426\def\setuptable#1{% 3427 \def\firstarg{#1}% 3428 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 3429 \let\go = \relax 3430 \else 3431 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 3432 \global\setpercenttrue 3433 \else 3434 \ifsetpercent 3435 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 3436 \else 3437 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3438 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 3439 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 3440 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 3441 \fi 3442 \fi 3443 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 3444 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 3445 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 3446 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 3447 \else 3448 \let\go = \setuptable 3449 \fi% 3450 \fi 3451 \go 3452} 3453 3454% multitable-only commands. 3455% 3456% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. 3457% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group 3458% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. 3459\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% 3460% 3461% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 3462% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 3463% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. 3464% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 3465\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 3466 3467% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 3468% 3469\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 3470% 3471\envdef\multitable{% 3472 \vskip\parskip 3473 \startsavinginserts 3474 % 3475 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 3476 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 3477 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 3478 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 3479 \def\item{\crcr}% 3480 % 3481 \tolerance=9500 3482 \hbadness=9500 3483 \setmultitablespacing 3484 \parskip=\multitableparskip 3485 \parindent=\multitableparindent 3486 \overfullrule=0pt 3487 \global\colcount=0 3488 % 3489 \everycr = {% 3490 \noalign{% 3491 \global\everytab={}% 3492 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 3493 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. 3494 \checkinserts 3495 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. 3496 %\filbreak 3497 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the 3498 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the 3499 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. 3500 }% 3501 }% 3502 % 3503 \parsearg\domultitable 3504} 3505\def\domultitable#1{% 3506 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 3507 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 3508 % 3509 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 3510 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 3511 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 3512 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 3513 \halign\bgroup &% 3514 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3515 \multistrut 3516 \vtop{% 3517 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 3518 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 3519 % 3520 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 3521 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 3522 % the first one. 3523 % 3524 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 3525 % to the width of each template entry. 3526 % 3527 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 3528 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 3529 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 3530 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 3531 % 3532 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 3533 \rightskip=0pt 3534 \ifnum\colcount=1 3535 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 3536 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 3537 \else 3538 \ifsetpercent \else 3539 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 3540 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 3541 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 3542 \fi 3543 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 3544 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 3545 \fi 3546 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 3547 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 3548 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 3549 % For example: 3550 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 3551 % @item @code{#} 3552 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 3553 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 3554 % marking characters. 3555 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 3556 }\cr 3557} 3558\def\Emultitable{% 3559 \crcr 3560 \egroup % end the \halign 3561 \global\setpercentfalse 3562} 3563 3564\def\setmultitablespacing{% 3565 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 3566 % 3567 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 3568 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 3569 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 3570 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 3571\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 3572\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 3573\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 3574\fi 3575%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 3576%% table. If not, do nothing. 3577%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 3578\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 3579\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 3580\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 3581 %% than skip between lines in the table. 3582\fi% 3583\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 3584\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 3585\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 3586 %% than skip between lines in the table. 3587\fi} 3588 3589 3590\message{conditionals,} 3591 3592% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 3593% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 3594% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 3595% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 3596% attempt to close an environment group. 3597% 3598\def\makecond#1{% 3599 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 3600 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 3601} 3602\makecond{iftex} 3603\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 3604\makecond{ifnothtml} 3605\makecond{ifnotinfo} 3606\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 3607\makecond{ifnotxml} 3608 3609% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 3610% 3611\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 3612\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 3613\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 3614\def\html{\doignore{html}} 3615\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 3616\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 3617\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 3618\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 3619\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 3620\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 3621\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 3622\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 3623\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 3624 3625% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 3626% 3627% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 3628\newcount\doignorecount 3629 3630\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 3631 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 3632 \obeylines 3633 \catcode`\@ = \other 3634 \catcode`\{ = \other 3635 \catcode`\} = \other 3636 % 3637 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 3638 \spaceisspace 3639 % 3640 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 3641 \doignorecount = 0 3642 % 3643 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 3644 \dodoignore{#1}% 3645} 3646 3647{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 3648 \obeylines % 3649 % 3650 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 3651 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 3652 % 3653 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 3654 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 3655 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 3656 % 3657 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 3658 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 3659 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 3660 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 3661 % 3662 % And now expand that command. 3663 \doignoretext ^^M% 3664 }% 3665} 3666 3667\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 3668 \def\temp{#1}% 3669 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 3670 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 3671 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 3672 \advance\doignorecount by 1 3673 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 3674 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 3675 \fi 3676 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 3677} 3678 3679% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 3680% 3681\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 3682 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 3683 \let\next\enddoignore 3684 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 3685 \advance\doignorecount by -1 3686 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 3687 \fi 3688 \next 3689} 3690 3691% Finish off ignored text. 3692{ \obeylines% 3693 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 3694 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 3695 % would result in a blank line in the output. 3696 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 3697} 3698 3699 3700% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 3701% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 3702% 3703% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 3704% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 3705% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 3706% didn't need it. 3707% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 3708% 3709\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 3710\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 3711 {% 3712 \makevalueexpandable 3713 \def\temp{#2}% 3714 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 3715 \ifx\temp\empty 3716 \next{}% 3717 \else 3718 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 3719 \fi 3720 }% 3721} 3722% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 3723\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 3724 3725% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 3726% 3727\parseargdef\clear{% 3728 {% 3729 \makevalueexpandable 3730 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 3731 }% 3732} 3733 3734% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 3735\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 3736\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 3737{ 3738 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active 3739 % 3740 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 3741 \let\value = \expandablevalue 3742 % We don't want these characters active, ... 3743 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 3744 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 3745 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 3746 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 3747 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore 3748 } 3749} 3750 3751% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 3752% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 3753% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 3754% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 3755% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 3756% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 3757% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 3758% 3759\def\expandablevalue#1{% 3760 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 3761 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 3762 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 3763 \else 3764 \csname SET#1\endcsname 3765 \fi 3766} 3767 3768% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 3769% with @set. 3770% 3771% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. 3772% 3773\makecond{ifset} 3774\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 3775\def\doifset#1#2{% 3776 {% 3777 \makevalueexpandable 3778 \let\next=\empty 3779 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 3780 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 3781 \fi 3782 \expandafter 3783 }\next 3784} 3785\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 3786 3787% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been 3788% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 3789% 3790% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 3791% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 3792% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 3793% 3794\makecond{ifclear} 3795\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 3796\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 3797 3798% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 3799% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 3800\let\dircategory=\comment 3801 3802% @defininfoenclose. 3803\let\definfoenclose=\comment 3804 3805 3806\message{indexing,} 3807% Index generation facilities 3808 3809% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 3810% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 3811\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 3812 3813% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. 3814% It automatically defines \fooindex such that 3815% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. 3816% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for 3817% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. 3818% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 3819% for the sake of vms. 3820% 3821\def\newindex#1{% 3822 \iflinks 3823 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 3824 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file 3825 \fi 3826 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 3827 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 3828} 3829 3830% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 3831% 3832\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 3833 3834% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 3835% 3836\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 3837% 3838\def\newcodeindex#1{% 3839 \iflinks 3840 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 3841 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 3842 \fi 3843 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 3844 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 3845} 3846 3847 3848% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 3849% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 3850% 3851% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 3852% inside @code. 3853% 3854\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 3855\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 3856 3857% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 3858% #3 the target index (bar). 3859\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 3860 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up 3861 % closing the target index. 3862 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined 3863 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the 3864 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. 3865 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname 3866 \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 3867 \fi 3868 % redefine \fooindfile: 3869 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 3870 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 3871 % redefine \fooindex: 3872 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 3873} 3874 3875% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. 3876% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 3877% and it is "foo", the name of the index. 3878 3879% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. 3880% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. 3881 3882% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 3883% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 3884 3885\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} 3886\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 3887 3888% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 3889\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} 3890\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 3891 3892% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 3893% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, 3894% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. 3895% 3896\def\indexdummies{% 3897 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 3898 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. 3899 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% 3900 % 3901 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. 3902 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes 3903 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. 3904 \let\{ = \mylbrace 3905 \let\} = \myrbrace 3906 % 3907 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is 3908 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts 3909 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, 3910 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput 3911 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput 3912 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that 3913 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it 3914 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that 3915 % is still getting written without apparent harm. 3916 % 3917 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to 3918 % help-texinfo, 22may06): 3919 % @macro funindex {WORD} 3920 % @findex xyz 3921 % @end macro 3922 % ... 3923 % @funindex commtest 3924 % 3925 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. 3926 % 3927 % Sample whatsit resulting: 3928 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} 3929 % 3930 % So: 3931 \let\endinput = \empty 3932 % 3933 % Do the redefinitions. 3934 \commondummies 3935} 3936 3937% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to 3938% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of 3939% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, 3940% this will be simpler. 3941% 3942\def\atdummies{% 3943 \def\@{@@}% 3944 \def\ {@ }% 3945 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd 3946 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd 3947 % 3948 % Do the redefinitions. 3949 \commondummies 3950 \otherbackslash 3951} 3952 3953% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. 3954% 3955\def\commondummies{% 3956 % 3957 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 3958 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, 3959 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 3960 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 3961 % from whatever follows. 3962 % 3963 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 3964 % space. 3965 % 3966 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 3967 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 3968 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 3969 % 3970 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% 3971 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% 3972 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 3973 % 3974 \commondummiesnofonts 3975 % 3976 \definedummyletter\_% 3977 % 3978 % Non-English letters. 3979 \definedummyword\AA 3980 \definedummyword\AE 3981 \definedummyword\L 3982 \definedummyword\OE 3983 \definedummyword\O 3984 \definedummyword\aa 3985 \definedummyword\ae 3986 \definedummyword\l 3987 \definedummyword\oe 3988 \definedummyword\o 3989 \definedummyword\ss 3990 \definedummyword\exclamdown 3991 \definedummyword\questiondown 3992 \definedummyword\ordf 3993 \definedummyword\ordm 3994 % 3995 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 3996 \definedummyword\bf 3997 \definedummyword\gtr 3998 \definedummyword\hat 3999 \definedummyword\less 4000 \definedummyword\sf 4001 \definedummyword\sl 4002 \definedummyword\tclose 4003 \definedummyword\tt 4004 % 4005 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4006 \definedummyword\TeX 4007 % 4008 % Assorted special characters. 4009 \definedummyword\bullet 4010 \definedummyword\comma 4011 \definedummyword\copyright 4012 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4013 \definedummyword\dots 4014 \definedummyword\enddots 4015 \definedummyword\equiv 4016 \definedummyword\error 4017 \definedummyword\euro 4018 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4019 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4020 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4021 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4022 \definedummyword\expansion 4023 \definedummyword\minus 4024 \definedummyword\pounds 4025 \definedummyword\point 4026 \definedummyword\print 4027 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4028 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4029 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4030 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4031 \definedummyword\quoteright 4032 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4033 \definedummyword\result 4034 \definedummyword\textdegree 4035 % 4036 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4037 \macrolist 4038 % 4039 \normalturnoffactive 4040 % 4041 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any 4042 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. 4043 \makevalueexpandable 4044} 4045 4046% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. 4047% 4048\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4049 % Control letters and accents. 4050 \definedummyletter\!% 4051 \definedummyaccent\"% 4052 \definedummyaccent\'% 4053 \definedummyletter\*% 4054 \definedummyaccent\,% 4055 \definedummyletter\.% 4056 \definedummyletter\/% 4057 \definedummyletter\:% 4058 \definedummyaccent\=% 4059 \definedummyletter\?% 4060 \definedummyaccent\^% 4061 \definedummyaccent\`% 4062 \definedummyaccent\~% 4063 \definedummyword\u 4064 \definedummyword\v 4065 \definedummyword\H 4066 \definedummyword\dotaccent 4067 \definedummyword\ringaccent 4068 \definedummyword\tieaccent 4069 \definedummyword\ubaraccent 4070 \definedummyword\udotaccent 4071 \definedummyword\dotless 4072 % 4073 % Texinfo font commands. 4074 \definedummyword\b 4075 \definedummyword\i 4076 \definedummyword\r 4077 \definedummyword\sc 4078 \definedummyword\t 4079 % 4080 % Commands that take arguments. 4081 \definedummyword\acronym 4082 \definedummyword\cite 4083 \definedummyword\code 4084 \definedummyword\command 4085 \definedummyword\dfn 4086 \definedummyword\emph 4087 \definedummyword\env 4088 \definedummyword\file 4089 \definedummyword\kbd 4090 \definedummyword\key 4091 \definedummyword\math 4092 \definedummyword\option 4093 \definedummyword\pxref 4094 \definedummyword\ref 4095 \definedummyword\samp 4096 \definedummyword\strong 4097 \definedummyword\tie 4098 \definedummyword\uref 4099 \definedummyword\url 4100 \definedummyword\var 4101 \definedummyword\verb 4102 \definedummyword\w 4103 \definedummyword\xref 4104} 4105 4106% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 4107% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 4108% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 4109% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 4110% 4111\def\indexnofonts{% 4112 % Accent commands should become @asis. 4113 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 4114 % We can just ignore other control letters. 4115 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 4116 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. 4117 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent 4118 % 4119 \commondummiesnofonts 4120 % 4121 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 4122 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 4123 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 4124 %\let\tt=\asis 4125 % 4126 \def\ { }% 4127 \def\@{@}% 4128 % how to handle braces? 4129 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 4130 % 4131 % Non-English letters. 4132 \def\AA{AA}% 4133 \def\AE{AE}% 4134 \def\L{L}% 4135 \def\OE{OE}% 4136 \def\O{O}% 4137 \def\aa{aa}% 4138 \def\ae{ae}% 4139 \def\l{l}% 4140 \def\oe{oe}% 4141 \def\o{o}% 4142 \def\ss{ss}% 4143 \def\exclamdown{!}% 4144 \def\questiondown{?}% 4145 \def\ordf{a}% 4146 \def\ordm{o}% 4147 % 4148 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 4149 \def\TeX{TeX}% 4150 % 4151 % Assorted special characters. 4152 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) 4153 \def\bullet{bullet}% 4154 \def\comma{,}% 4155 \def\copyright{copyright}% 4156 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% 4157 \def\dots{...}% 4158 \def\enddots{...}% 4159 \def\equiv{==}% 4160 \def\error{error}% 4161 \def\euro{euro}% 4162 \def\guillemetleft{<<}% 4163 \def\guillemetright{>>}% 4164 \def\guilsinglleft{<}% 4165 \def\guilsinglright{>}% 4166 \def\expansion{==>}% 4167 \def\minus{-}% 4168 \def\pounds{pounds}% 4169 \def\point{.}% 4170 \def\print{-|}% 4171 \def\quotedblbase{"}% 4172 \def\quotedblleft{"}% 4173 \def\quotedblright{"}% 4174 \def\quoteleft{`}% 4175 \def\quoteright{'}% 4176 \def\quotesinglbase{,}% 4177 \def\result{=>}% 4178 \def\textdegree{degrees}% 4179 % 4180 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 4181 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 4182 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 4183 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 4184 % that starts with \. 4185 % 4186 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 4187 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 4188 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 4189 % 4190 \macrolist 4191} 4192 4193\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. 4194\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 4195 4196% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 4197% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 4198\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 4199 4200% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. 4201% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 4202% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 4203% is with most defuns, which call us directly). 4204% 4205\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 4206 \iflinks 4207 {% 4208 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 4209 \toks0 = {#2}% 4210 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 4211 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 4212 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 4213 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 4214 \fi 4215 % 4216 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 4217 % 4218 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 4219 }% 4220 \fi 4221} 4222 4223% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: 4224% 4225\def\dosubindwrite{% 4226 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 4227 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 4228 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 4229 \fi 4230 % 4231 % Remember, we are within a group. 4232 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 4233 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now 4234 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. 4235 % 4236 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to 4237 % get the string to sort by. 4238 {\indexnofonts 4239 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion 4240 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% 4241 }% 4242 % 4243 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 4244 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 4245 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 4246 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 4247 % sorted result. 4248 \edef\temp{% 4249 \write\writeto{% 4250 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 4251 }% 4252 \temp 4253} 4254 4255% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 4256% 4257% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 4258% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 4259% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 4260% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 4261% sequences like this: 4262% @end defun 4263% @tindex whatever 4264% @defun ... 4265% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 4266% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 4267% the previous defun. 4268% 4269% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 4270% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 4271% 4272% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 4273% 4274% But wait, there is a catch there: 4275% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 4276% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 4277% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 4278% representation of the skip. 4279% 4280% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 4281% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 4282% 4283\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 4284% 4285\newskip\whatsitskip 4286\newcount\whatsitpenalty 4287% 4288% ..., ready, GO: 4289% 4290\def\safewhatsit#1{% 4291\ifhmode 4292 #1% 4293\else 4294 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 4295 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 4296 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 4297 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 4298 % 4299 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 4300 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 4301 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 4302 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 4303 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 4304 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4305 \else 4306 \vskip-\whatsitskip 4307 \fi 4308 % 4309 #1% 4310 % 4311 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4312 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 4313 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 4314 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 4315 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 4316 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 4317 % 4318 % @deffn deffn-whatever 4319 % @vindex index-whatever 4320 % Description. 4321 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 4322 % and the "Description." paragraph. 4323 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 4324 \else 4325 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 4326 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 4327 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 4328 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 4329 \fi 4330\fi 4331} 4332 4333% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 4334% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 4335% or 4336% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 4337% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 4338% containing these kinds of lines: 4339% \initial {c} 4340% before the first topic whose initial is c 4341% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 4342% for a topic that is used without subtopics 4343% \primary {topic} 4344% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 4345% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 4346% for each subtopic. 4347 4348% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 4349% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 4350 4351\def\findex {\fnindex} 4352\def\kindex {\kyindex} 4353\def\cindex {\cpindex} 4354\def\vindex {\vrindex} 4355\def\tindex {\tpindex} 4356\def\pindex {\pgindex} 4357 4358\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 4359{\obeylines % 4360\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 4361\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 4362 4363% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 4364 4365% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 4366% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 4367% 4368\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 4369 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 4370 % 4371 \smallfonts \rm 4372 \tolerance = 9500 4373 \plainfrenchspacing 4374 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 4375 % 4376 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 4377 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 4378 % \initial {@} 4379 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 4380 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 4381 \catcode`\@ = 11 4382 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s 4383 \ifeof 1 4384 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 4385 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 4386 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 4387 % there is some text. 4388 \putwordIndexNonexistent 4389 \else 4390 % 4391 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 4392 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 4393 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 4394 \read 1 to \temp 4395 \ifeof 1 4396 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 4397 \else 4398 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 4399 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 4400 % to make right now. 4401 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% 4402 \catcode`\\ = 0 4403 \escapechar = `\\ 4404 \begindoublecolumns 4405 \input \jobname.#1s 4406 \enddoublecolumns 4407 \fi 4408 \fi 4409 \closein 1 4410\endgroup} 4411 4412% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 4413% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 4414 4415\def\initial#1{{% 4416 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. 4417 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt 4418 % 4419 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 4420 \removelastskip 4421 % 4422 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 4423 \nobreak 4424 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip 4425 \penalty 0 4426 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip 4427 % 4428 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 4429 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 4430 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 4431 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 4432 % 4433 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 4434 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip 4435 \leftline{\secbf #1}% 4436 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 4437 \nobreak 4438 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 4439}} 4440 4441% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 4442% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 4443% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 4444% 4445% A straightforward implementation would start like this: 4446% \def\entry#1#2{... 4447% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to 4448% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- 4449% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. 4450% 4451% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. 4452% --kasal, 21nov03 4453\def\entry{% 4454 \begingroup 4455 % 4456 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 4457 % affect previous text. 4458 \par 4459 % 4460 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. 4461 \parfillskip = 0in 4462 % 4463 % No extra space above this paragraph. 4464 \parskip = 0in 4465 % 4466 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 4467 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 4468 % 4469 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number 4470 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the 4471 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large 4472 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across 4473 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. 4474 % 4475 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start 4476 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. 4477 \hangindent = 2em 4478 % 4479 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line 4480 % with blank space. 4481 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil 4482 % 4483 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing 4484 % columns. 4485 \vskip 0pt plus1pt 4486 % 4487 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 4488 \afterassignment\doentry 4489 \let\temp = 4490} 4491\def\doentry{% 4492 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 4493 \noindent 4494 \aftergroup\finishentry 4495 % And now comes the text of the entry. 4496} 4497\def\finishentry#1{% 4498 % #1 is the page number. 4499 % 4500 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if 4501 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be 4502 % cursed by a Unix daemon. 4503 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% 4504 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt 4505 \ % 4506 \else 4507 % 4508 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out 4509 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the 4510 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) 4511 \hfil\penalty50 4512 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 4513 % 4514 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as 4515 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull 4516 % \hbox ensues. 4517 \ifpdf 4518 \pdfgettoks#1.% 4519 \ \the\toksA 4520 \else 4521 \ #1% 4522 \fi 4523 \fi 4524 \par 4525 \endgroup 4526} 4527 4528% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 4529\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 4530 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} 4531 4532\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 4533 4534\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 4535\def\secondary#1#2{{% 4536 \parfillskip=0in 4537 \parskip=0in 4538 \hangindent=1in 4539 \hangafter=1 4540 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 4541 \ifpdf 4542 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 4543 \else 4544 #2 4545 \fi 4546 \par 4547}} 4548 4549% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 4550% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 4551% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 4552\catcode`\@=11 4553 4554\newbox\partialpage 4555\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 4556 4557\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 4558 % Grab any single-column material above us. 4559 \output = {% 4560 % 4561 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 4562 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 4563 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 4564 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 4565 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 4566 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 4567 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 4568 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 4569 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 4570 \fi 4571 % 4572 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 4573 % Unvbox the main output page. 4574 \unvbox\PAGE 4575 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 4576 }% 4577 }% 4578 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 4579 % 4580 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 4581 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 4582 % 4583 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 4584 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 4585 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 4586 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 4587 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 4588 % 4589 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 4590 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 4591 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 4592 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 4593 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 4594 % 4595 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 4596 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 4597 % been clobbered. 4598 % 4599 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 4600 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 4601 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 4602 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 4603 % 4604 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, 4605 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) 4606 \vsize = 2\vsize 4607} 4608 4609% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 4610% the last. 4611% 4612\def\doublecolumnout{% 4613 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 4614 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 4615 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 4616 % previous page. 4617 \dimen@ = \vsize 4618 \divide\dimen@ by 2 4619 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage 4620 % 4621 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 4622 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ 4623 \onepageout\pagesofar 4624 \unvbox255 4625 \penalty\outputpenalty 4626} 4627% 4628% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 4629% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 4630\def\pagesofar{% 4631 \unvbox\partialpage 4632 % 4633 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 4634 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 4635 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 4636} 4637% 4638% All done with double columns. 4639\def\enddoublecolumns{% 4640 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 4641 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 4642 % following situation: 4643 % 4644 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 4645 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 4646 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 4647 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 4648 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 4649 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 4650 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 4651 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 4652 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 4653 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 4654 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 4655 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 4656 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 4657 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 4658 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 4659 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 4660 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 4661 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see 4662 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 4663 % 4664 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 4665 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 4666 \penalty0 4667 % 4668 \output = {% 4669 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the 4670 % current page, no automatic page break. 4671 \balancecolumns 4672 % 4673 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, 4674 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output 4675 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 4676 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 4677 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be 4678 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes 4679 % the output somewhat more palatable.) 4680 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 4681 }% 4682 \eject 4683 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 4684 % 4685 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 4686 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 4687 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the 4688 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). 4689 \pagegoal = \vsize 4690} 4691% 4692% Called at the end of the double column material. 4693\def\balancecolumns{% 4694 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 4695 \dimen@ = \ht0 4696 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 4697 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 4698 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 4699 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% 4700 \splittopskip = \topskip 4701 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. 4702 {% 4703 \vbadness = 10000 4704 \loop 4705 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 4706 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 4707 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ 4708 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 4709 \repeat 4710 }% 4711 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% 4712 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% 4713 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% 4714 % 4715 \pagesofar 4716} 4717\catcode`\@ = \other 4718 4719 4720\message{sectioning,} 4721% Chapters, sections, etc. 4722 4723% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered 4724% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 4725% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 4726% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 4727% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 4728\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 4729\newcount\chapno 4730\newcount\secno \secno=0 4731\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 4732\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 4733 4734% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 4735\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 4736% 4737% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 4738% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 4739% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 4740% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 4741% 4742\def\appendixletter{% 4743 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 4744 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 4745 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 4746 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 4747 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 4748 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 4749 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 4750 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 4751 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 4752 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 4753 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 4754 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 4755 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 4756 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 4757 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 4758 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 4759 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 4760 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 4761 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 4762 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 4763 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 4764 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 4765 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 4766 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 4767 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 4768 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 4769 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 4770 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 4771 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 4772 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 4773 \else\char\the\appendixno 4774 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 4775 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 4776 4777% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 4778% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 4779% these. @section does likewise. 4780\def\thischapter{} 4781\def\thischapternum{} 4782\def\thischaptername{} 4783\def\thissection{} 4784\def\thissectionnum{} 4785\def\thissectionname{} 4786 4787\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 4788\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 4789 4790% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 4791\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 4792\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 4793 4794% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 4795\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 4796\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 4797 4798% we only have subsub. 4799\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 4800% 4801% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 4802% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 4803\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel 4804% 4805% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 4806% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 4807\def\chapheadtype{N} 4808 4809% Choose a heading macro 4810% #1 is heading type 4811% #2 is heading level 4812% #3 is text for heading 4813\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 4814 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 4815 \absseclevel=#2 4816 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 4817 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 4818 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 4819 \absseclevel = 0 4820 \else 4821 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 4822 \absseclevel = 3 4823 \fi 4824 \fi 4825 % The heading type: 4826 \def\headtype{#1}% 4827 \if \headtype U% 4828 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel 4829 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel 4830 \fi 4831 \else 4832 % Check for appendix sections: 4833 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 4834 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 4835 \else 4836 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 4837 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 4838 \fi\fi 4839 \fi 4840 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 4841 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel 4842 \def\headtype{U}% 4843 \else 4844 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 4845 \fi 4846 \fi 4847 % Now print the heading: 4848 \if \headtype U% 4849 \ifcase\absseclevel 4850 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 4851 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 4852 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 4853 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4854 \fi 4855 \else 4856 \if \headtype A% 4857 \ifcase\absseclevel 4858 \appendixzzz{#3}% 4859 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 4860 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 4861 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4862 \fi 4863 \else 4864 \ifcase\absseclevel 4865 \chapterzzz{#3}% 4866 \or \seczzz{#3}% 4867 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 4868 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4869 \fi 4870 \fi 4871 \fi 4872 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 4873} 4874 4875% an interface: 4876\def\numhead{\genhead N} 4877\def\apphead{\genhead A} 4878\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 4879 4880% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 4881% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 4882% 4883% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 4884% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 4885\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 4886% 4887\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 4888\def\chapterzzz#1{% 4889 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 4890 % as an @include file. 4891 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4892 \global\advance\chapno by 1 4893 % 4894 % Used for \float. 4895 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 4896 \resetallfloatnos 4897 % 4898 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% 4899 % 4900 % Write the actual heading. 4901 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 4902 % 4903 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 4904 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 4905 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 4906 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 4907} 4908 4909\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz 4910\def\appendixzzz#1{% 4911 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4912 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 4913 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 4914 \resetallfloatnos 4915 % 4916 \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% 4917 \message{\appendixnum}% 4918 % 4919 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 4920 % 4921 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 4922 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 4923 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 4924} 4925 4926\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz 4927\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 4928 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4929 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 4930 % 4931 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 4932 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 4933 \resetallfloatnos 4934 % 4935 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 4936 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 4937 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 4938 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 4939 % to be executed, not expanded). 4940 % 4941 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 4942 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 4943 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 4944 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 4945 % the toc entries.) 4946 \toks0 = {#1}% 4947 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 4948 % 4949 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 4950 % 4951 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 4952 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 4953 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 4954} 4955 4956% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 4957\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 4958 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break 4959 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. 4960 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 4961 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 4962 \unnmhead0{#1}% 4963 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 4964} 4965 4966% @top is like @unnumbered. 4967\let\top\unnumbered 4968 4969% Sections. 4970\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 4971\def\seczzz#1{% 4972 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4973 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 4974} 4975 4976\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz 4977\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 4978 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4979 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 4980} 4981\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 4982 4983\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz 4984\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 4985 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4986 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 4987} 4988 4989% Subsections. 4990\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz 4991\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 4992 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4993 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 4994} 4995 4996\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz 4997\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 4998 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4999 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 5000 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5001} 5002 5003\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz 5004\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 5005 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5006 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 5007 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5008} 5009 5010% Subsubsections. 5011\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz 5012\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5013 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5014 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 5015 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5016} 5017 5018\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz 5019\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 5020 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5021 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 5022 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5023} 5024 5025\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz 5026\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5027 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5028 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 5029 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5030} 5031 5032% These macros control what the section commands do, according 5033% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 5034% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 5035\let\section = \numberedsec 5036\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5037\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5038 5039% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 5040 5041% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: 5042% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit 5043% overlong headings to fold. 5044% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a 5045% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. 5046% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and 5047% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. 5048 5049 5050\def\majorheading{% 5051 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 5052 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 5053} 5054 5055\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 5056\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 5057 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5058 \parindent=0pt\raggedright 5059 \rm #1\hfill}}% 5060 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax 5061 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5062} 5063 5064% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 5065\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5066 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5067\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5068 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5069\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5070 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5071 5072% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 5073% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 5074% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 5075 5076%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 5077\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 5078 5079%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it 5080% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 5081 5082\newskip\chapheadingskip 5083 5084\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 5085\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 5086% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 5087% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 5088% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 5089\def\chapoddpage{% 5090 \chappager 5091 \ifodd\pageno \else 5092 \begingroup 5093 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 5094 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 5095 \hbox to 0pt{}% 5096 \chappager 5097 \endgroup 5098 \fi 5099} 5100 5101\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 5102 5103\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 5104\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5105\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 5106\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 5107 5108\def\CHAPPAGon{% 5109\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5110\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 5111\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 5112\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 5113 5114\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 5115\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 5116\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 5117\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 5118\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 5119 5120\CHAPPAGon 5121 5122% Chapter opening. 5123% 5124% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 5125% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 5126% 5127% To test against our argument. 5128\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 5129\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 5130\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 5131% 5132\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 5133 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5134 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5135 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5136 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5137 \gdef\thissection{}}% 5138 % 5139 \def\temptype{#2}% 5140 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5141 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5142 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 5143 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5144 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5145 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 5146 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5147 \toks0={#1}% 5148 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5149 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5150 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 5151 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum: 5152 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5153 }% 5154 \else 5155 \toks0={#1}% 5156 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5157 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5158 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 5159 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum: 5160 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5161 }% 5162 \fi\fi\fi 5163 % 5164 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5165 % the preceding space. 5166 \safewhatsit\domark 5167 % 5168 % Insert the chapter heading break. 5169 \pchapsepmacro 5170 % 5171 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5172 % between here and the heading. 5173 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5174 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5175 \domark 5176 % 5177 {% 5178 \chapfonts \rm 5179 % 5180 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 5181 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 5182 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 5183 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5184 % 5185 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 5186 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 5187 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5188 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5189 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 5190 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5191 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 5192 \def\toctype{omit}% 5193 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5194 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 5195 \def\toctype{app}% 5196 \else 5197 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 5198 \def\toctype{numchap}% 5199 \fi\fi\fi 5200 % 5201 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 5202 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 5203 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 5204 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 5205 % 5206 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 5207 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 5208 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 5209 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 5210 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 5211 \donoderef{#2}% 5212 % 5213 % Typeset the actual heading. 5214 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 5215 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright 5216 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 5217 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 5218 }% 5219 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 5220 \nobreak 5221} 5222 5223% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 5224\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5225\def\centerparameters{% 5226 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 5227 \leftskip = \rightskip 5228 \parfillskip = 0pt 5229} 5230 5231 5232% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not 5233% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. 5234% 5235\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} 5236% 5237\def\unnchfopen #1{% 5238\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5239 \parindent=0pt\raggedright 5240 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 5241} 5242\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts 5243\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% 5244\par\penalty 5000 % 5245} 5246\def\centerchfopen #1{% 5247\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5248 \parindent=0pt 5249 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 5250} 5251\def\CHAPFopen{% 5252 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen 5253 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} 5254 5255 5256% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 5257% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 5258% 5259\newskip\secheadingskip 5260\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 5261 5262% Subsection titles. 5263\newskip\subsecheadingskip 5264\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 5265 5266% Subsubsection titles. 5267\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 5268\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 5269 5270 5271% Print any size, any type, section title. 5272% 5273% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is 5274% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the 5275% section number. 5276% 5277\def\seckeyword{sec} 5278% 5279\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 5280 {% 5281 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 5282 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 5283 % 5284 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 5285 \def\temptype{#3}% 5286 % 5287 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5288 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5289 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5290 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5291 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5292 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 5293 \fi 5294 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5295 % Don't redefine \thissection. 5296 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5297 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5298 \toks0={#1}% 5299 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5300 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5301 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5302 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5303 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5304 }% 5305 \fi 5306 \else 5307 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5308 \toks0={#1}% 5309 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5310 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5311 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5312 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5313 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5314 }% 5315 \fi 5316 \fi\fi\fi 5317 % 5318 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5319 % the preceding space. 5320 \safewhatsit\domark 5321 % 5322 % Insert space above the heading. 5323 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 5324 % 5325 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5326 % between here and the heading. 5327 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5328 \domark 5329 % 5330 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 5331 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5332 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5333 \def\toctype{unn}% 5334 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5335 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5336 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 5337 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 5338 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5339 \def\toctype{omit}% 5340 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 5341 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5342 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5343 \def\toctype{app}% 5344 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5345 \else 5346 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5347 \def\toctype{num}% 5348 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5349 \fi\fi\fi 5350 % 5351 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 5352 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 5353 % 5354 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 5355 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 5356 \donoderef{#3}% 5357 % 5358 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 5359 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 5360 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 5361 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 5362 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 5363 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 5364 \nobreak 5365 % 5366 % Output the actual section heading. 5367 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright 5368 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 5369 \unhbox0 #1}% 5370 }% 5371 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 5372 % Don't allow stretch, though. 5373 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 5374 % 5375 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 5376 % was followed by glue. 5377 \nobreak 5378 % 5379 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 5380 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 5381 % discardable item.) 5382 \vskip-\parskip 5383 % 5384 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > 5385 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after 5386 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: 5387 % 5388 % @section sec-whatever 5389 % @deffn def-whatever 5390 \penalty 10001 5391} 5392 5393 5394\message{toc,} 5395% Table of contents. 5396\newwrite\tocfile 5397 5398% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 5399% Called from @chapter, etc. 5400% 5401% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 5402% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 5403% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 5404% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 5405% destination to jump to. 5406% 5407% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 5408% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 5409% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 5410% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 5411% 5412\newif\iftocfileopened 5413\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 5414% 5415\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 5416 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 5417 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 5418 \iftocfileopened\else 5419 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 5420 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 5421 \fi 5422 % 5423 \iflinks 5424 {\atdummies 5425 \edef\temp{% 5426 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 5427 \temp 5428 }% 5429 \fi 5430 \fi 5431 % 5432 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 5433 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 5434 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 5435 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 5436 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 5437 % `1', and two named `2'. 5438 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi 5439} 5440 5441 5442% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 5443% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 5444% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 5445% 5446\def\activecatcodes{% 5447 \catcode`\"=\active 5448 \catcode`\$=\active 5449 \catcode`\<=\active 5450 \catcode`\>=\active 5451 \catcode`\\=\active 5452 \catcode`\^=\active 5453 \catcode`\_=\active 5454 \catcode`\|=\active 5455 \catcode`\~=\active 5456} 5457 5458 5459% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 5460\def\readtocfile{% 5461 \setupdatafile 5462 \activecatcodes 5463 \input \tocreadfilename 5464} 5465 5466\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 5467\newcount\savepageno 5468\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 5469 5470% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 5471% 5472\def\startcontents#1{% 5473 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 5474 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 5475 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 5476 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 5477 \contentsalignmacro 5478 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 5479 % 5480 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 5481 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 5482 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 5483 % 5484 \savepageno = \pageno 5485 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 5486 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 5487 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 5488 % 5489 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 5490 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 5491} 5492 5493% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 5494% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 5495% 5496\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 5497 5498% Normal (long) toc. 5499% 5500\def\contents{% 5501 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 5502 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 5503 \ifeof 1 \else 5504 \readtocfile 5505 \fi 5506 \vfill \eject 5507 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 5508 \ifeof 1 \else 5509 \pdfmakeoutlines 5510 \fi 5511 \closein 1 5512 \endgroup 5513 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 5514 \global\pageno = \savepageno 5515} 5516 5517% And just the chapters. 5518\def\summarycontents{% 5519 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 5520 % 5521 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 5522 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 5523 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 5524 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 5525 \secfonts 5526 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 5527 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 5528 \rm 5529 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 5530 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 5531 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 5532 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 5533 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 5534 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5535 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5536 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5537 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5538 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5539 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5540 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 5541 \ifeof 1 \else 5542 \readtocfile 5543 \fi 5544 \closein 1 5545 \vfill \eject 5546 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 5547 \endgroup 5548 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 5549 \global\pageno = \savepageno 5550} 5551\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 5552 5553% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 5554% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 5555% 5556\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 5557 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 5558 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 5559 % But use \hss just in case. 5560 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 5561 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 5562 % 5563 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 5564 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 5565 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 5566 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 5567 % there are before deciding ... 5568 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 5569} 5570 5571% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 5572% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 5573% The last argument is the page number. 5574% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 5575 5576% Chapters, in the main contents. 5577\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5578% 5579% Chapters, in the short toc. 5580% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 5581\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 5582 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 5583} 5584 5585% Appendices, in the main contents. 5586% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 5587% 5588\def\appendixbox#1{% 5589 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 5590 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 5591 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 5592% 5593\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5594 5595% Unnumbered chapters. 5596\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 5597\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 5598 5599% Sections. 5600\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5601\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 5602\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 5603 5604% Subsections. 5605\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5606\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 5607\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 5608 5609% And subsubsections. 5610\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5611\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 5612\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 5613 5614% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 5615% Same as \defaultparindent. 5616\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 5617 5618% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 5619% page number. 5620% 5621% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 5622% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 5623\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 5624 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 5625 \begingroup 5626 \chapentryfonts 5627 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5628 \endgroup 5629 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 5630} 5631 5632\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5633 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 5634 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5635\endgroup} 5636 5637\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5638 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 5639 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5640\endgroup} 5641 5642\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5643 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 5644 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5645\endgroup} 5646 5647% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 5648\let\tocentry = \entry 5649 5650% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 5651\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 5652 5653\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 5654\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 5655 5656\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 5657\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 5658\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 5659\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 5660 5661 5662\message{environments,} 5663% @foo ... @end foo. 5664 5665% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 5666% 5667% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 5668% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 5669% 5670\def\point{$\star$} 5671\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 5672\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 5673\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 5674\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 5675\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 5676 5677% The @error{} command. 5678% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 5679% 5680\newbox\errorbox 5681% 5682{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 5683\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 5684% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 5685\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt} 5686% 5687\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 5688 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 5689 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 5690 \vbox{% 5691 \hrule height\dimen2 5692 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 5693 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 5694 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 5695 \hrule height\dimen2} 5696 \hfil} 5697% 5698\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 5699 5700% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. 5701% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 5702% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. 5703 5704\envdef\tex{% 5705 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 5706 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 5707 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 5708 \catcode `\%=14 5709 \catcode `\+=\other 5710 \catcode `\"=\other 5711 \catcode `\|=\other 5712 \catcode `\<=\other 5713 \catcode `\>=\other 5714 \escapechar=`\\ 5715 % 5716 \let\b=\ptexb 5717 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 5718 \let\c=\ptexc 5719 \let\,=\ptexcomma 5720 \let\.=\ptexdot 5721 \let\dots=\ptexdots 5722 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 5723 \let\!=\ptexexclam 5724 \let\i=\ptexi 5725 \let\indent=\ptexindent 5726 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 5727 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 5728 \let\+=\tabalign 5729 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 5730 \let\/=\ptexslash 5731 \let\*=\ptexstar 5732 \let\t=\ptext 5733 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer 5734 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 5735 % 5736 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 5737 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 5738 \def\@{@}% 5739} 5740% There is no need to define \Etex. 5741 5742% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 5743% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 5744% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 5745 5746% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 5747\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 5748 5749% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 5750% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 5751% have any width. 5752\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 5753 5754% This space is always present above and below environments. 5755\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 5756 5757% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 5758% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 5759% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 5760% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 5761% 5762\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 5763 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 5764 % \sectionheading, q.v. 5765 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 5766 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 5767 \endgraf 5768 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 5769 \removelastskip 5770 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 5771 % or better ... 5772 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 5773 \vskip\envskipamount 5774 \fi 5775 \fi 5776}} 5777 5778\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak 5779 5780% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 5781% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 5782\let\nonarrowing=\relax 5783 5784% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 5785% environment contents. 5786\font\circle=lcircle10 5787\newdimen\circthick 5788\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 5789\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 5790\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 5791% 5792\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 5793\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 5794\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 5795\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 5796\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 5797 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 5798 \hskip\rskip}} 5799\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 5800 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 5801 \hskip\rskip}} 5802% 5803\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 5804 5805\envdef\cartouche{% 5806 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 5807 \startsavinginserts 5808 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 5809 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 5810 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 5811 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 5812 \cartouter=\hsize 5813 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 5814 % side, and for 6pt waste from 5815 % each corner char, and rule thickness 5816 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 5817 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. 5818 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5819 \vbox\bgroup 5820 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 5821 \carttop 5822 \hbox\bgroup 5823 \hskip\lskip 5824 \vrule\kern3pt 5825 \vbox\bgroup 5826 \kern3pt 5827 \hsize=\cartinner 5828 \baselineskip=\normbskip 5829 \lineskip=\normlskip 5830 \parskip=\normpskip 5831 \vskip -\parskip 5832 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. 5833} 5834\def\Ecartouche{% 5835 \ifhmode\par\fi 5836 \kern3pt 5837 \egroup 5838 \kern3pt\vrule 5839 \hskip\rskip 5840 \egroup 5841 \cartbot 5842 \egroup 5843 \checkinserts 5844} 5845 5846 5847% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 5848% inside a group. 5849\def\nonfillstart{% 5850 \aboveenvbreak 5851 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy 5852 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 5853 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 5854 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 5855 \parskip = 0pt 5856 \parindent = 0pt 5857 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 5858 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 5859 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 5860 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 5861 \else 5862 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 5863 \fi 5864 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 5865} 5866 5867% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 5868% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 5869% This affects the following displayed environments: 5870% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 5871% 5872\def\smallword{small} 5873\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 5874\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 5875\def\setnormaldispenv{% 5876 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 5877 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 5878 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 5879 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 5880 % to change the fonts afterward. 5881 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 5882 \smallexamplefonts \rm 5883 \fi 5884} 5885\def\setsmalldispenv{% 5886 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 5887 \else 5888 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 5889 \smallexamplefonts \rm 5890 \fi 5891} 5892 5893% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 5894% Let's do it by one command: 5895\def\makedispenv #1#2{ 5896 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} 5897 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} 5898 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 5899 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 5900} 5901 5902% Define two synonyms: 5903\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ 5904 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} 5905 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} 5906} 5907 5908% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. 5909% 5910% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 5911% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 5912% 5913\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% 5914 \nonfillstart 5915 \tt\quoteexpand 5916 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 5917 \gobble % eat return 5918} 5919% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 5920% 5921\makedispenv {display}{% 5922 \nonfillstart 5923 \gobble 5924} 5925 5926% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 5927% 5928\makedispenv{format}{% 5929 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5930 \nonfillstart 5931 \gobble 5932} 5933 5934% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 5935\envdef\flushleft{% 5936 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5937 \nonfillstart 5938 \gobble 5939} 5940\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 5941 5942% @flushright. 5943% 5944\envdef\flushright{% 5945 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5946 \nonfillstart 5947 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5948 \gobble 5949} 5950\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 5951 5952 5953% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 5954% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 5955% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 5956% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 5957% 5958\envdef\quotation{% 5959 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 5960 \parindent=0pt 5961 % 5962 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 5963 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 5964 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 5965 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 5966 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 5967 \else 5968 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 5969 \fi 5970 \parsearg\quotationlabel 5971} 5972 5973% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 5974% doing normal filling. 5975% 5976\def\Equotation{% 5977 \par 5978 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else 5979 % indent a bit. 5980 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 5981 \fi 5982 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 5983} 5984 5985% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 5986\def\quotationlabel#1{% 5987 \def\temp{#1}% 5988 \ifx\temp\empty \else 5989 {\bf #1: }% 5990 \fi 5991} 5992 5993 5994% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 5995% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 5996% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 5997% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 5998% 5999% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 6000% 6001% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 6002% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 6003% verbatim line. 6004\def\dospecials{% 6005 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 6006 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 6007 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 6008} 6009% 6010% [Knuth] p. 380 6011\def\uncatcodespecials{% 6012 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 6013% 6014% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 6015% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font 6016\begingroup 6017 \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} 6018\endgroup 6019% 6020% Setup for the @verb command. 6021% 6022% Eight spaces for a tab 6023\begingroup 6024 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6025 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 6026\endgroup 6027% 6028\def\setupverb{% 6029 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6030 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 6031 \catcode`\`=\active 6032 \tabeightspaces 6033 % Respect line breaks, 6034 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6035 % make each space count 6036 % must do in this order: 6037 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6038} 6039 6040% Setup for the @verbatim environment 6041% 6042% Real tab expansion 6043\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 6044% 6045\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} 6046 6047% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right 6048% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote 6049% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it 6050% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least 6051% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the 6052% regular 0x27. 6053% 6054\def\codequoteright{% 6055 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 6056 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 6057 '% 6058 \else \char'15 \fi 6059 \else \char'15 \fi 6060} 6061% 6062% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 6063% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 6064% the code environments to do likewise. 6065% 6066\def\codequoteleft{% 6067 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 6068 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 6069 `% 6070 \else \char'22 \fi 6071 \else \char'22 \fi 6072} 6073% 6074\begingroup 6075 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6076 \gdef\tabexpand{% 6077 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6078 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 6079 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab 6080 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw 6081 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 6082 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 6083 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox 6084 }% 6085 } 6086 \catcode`\'=\active 6087 \gdef\rquoteexpand{\catcode\rquoteChar=\active \def'{\codequoteright}}% 6088 % 6089 \catcode`\`=\active 6090 \gdef\lquoteexpand{\catcode\lquoteChar=\active \def`{\codequoteleft}}% 6091 % 6092 \gdef\quoteexpand{\rquoteexpand \lquoteexpand}% 6093\endgroup 6094 6095% start the verbatim environment. 6096\def\setupverbatim{% 6097 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6098 \nonfillstart 6099 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6100 \tt 6101 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% 6102 \catcode`\`=\active 6103 \tabexpand 6104 \quoteexpand 6105 % Respect line breaks, 6106 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6107 % make each space count 6108 % must do in this order: 6109 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6110 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 6111} 6112 6113% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 6114% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 6115% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 6116% 6117% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 6118% 6119% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 6120\begingroup 6121 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 6122 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 6123\endgroup 6124% 6125\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 6126% 6127% 6128% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 6129% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 6130% 6131% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 6132% 6133% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 6134% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 6135% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 6136% 6137% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 6138% 6139\begingroup 6140 \catcode`\ =\active 6141 \obeylines % 6142 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 6143 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 6144 % line in the output. 6145 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 6146 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 6147 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 6148\endgroup 6149% 6150\envdef\verbatim{% 6151 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 6152} 6153\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 6154 6155 6156% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 6157% 6158\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 6159% 6160\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 6161 {% 6162 \makevalueexpandable 6163 \setupverbatim 6164 \input #1 6165 \afterenvbreak 6166 }% 6167} 6168 6169% @copying ... @end copying. 6170% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 6171% 6172% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 6173% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 6174% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 6175% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 6176% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 6177% possible is very desirable. 6178% 6179\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 6180\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 6181% 6182\def\insertcopying{% 6183 \begingroup 6184 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 6185 \scanexp\copyingtext 6186 \endgroup 6187} 6188 6189 6190\message{defuns,} 6191% @defun etc. 6192 6193\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 6194\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 6195\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 6196\newcount\defunpenalty 6197 6198% Start the processing of @deffn: 6199\def\startdefun{% 6200 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 6201 \medbreak 6202 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 6203 % following @def command, see below. 6204 \else 6205 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 6206 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 6207 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 6208 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 6209 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 6210 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 6211 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 6212 % 6213 % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 6214 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 6215 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 6216 % @def command. 6217 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6218 % 6219 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 6220 % But do insert the glue. 6221 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 6222 \fi 6223 % 6224 \parindent=0in 6225 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 6226 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6227} 6228 6229\def\dodefunx#1{% 6230 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 6231 \checkenv#1% 6232 % 6233 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 6234 % It's not a great place, though. 6235 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6236 % 6237 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 6238 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 6239} 6240\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 6241 6242% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 6243% 6244\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 6245 \begingroup 6246 % call \deffnheader: 6247 #1#2 \endheader 6248 % common ending: 6249 \interlinepenalty = 10000 6250 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil 6251 \endgraf 6252 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 6253 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 6254 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 6255 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 6256 \checkparencounts 6257 \endgroup 6258} 6259 6260\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 6261 6262% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 6263% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader. 6264% 6265\def\makedefun#1{% 6266 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 6267 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 6268 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 6269 \temp 6270} 6271 6272% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader 6273% 6274% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 6275% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 6276% 6277\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 6278 \envdef#1{% 6279 \startdefun 6280 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 6281 }% 6282 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 6283 \def#3% 6284} 6285 6286%%% Untyped functions: 6287 6288% @deffn category name args 6289\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 6290 6291% @deffn category class name args 6292\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6293 6294% \defopon {category on}class name args 6295\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6296 6297% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 6298% 6299\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 6300 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 6301 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 6302 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 6303} 6304 6305%%% Typed functions: 6306 6307% @deftypefn category type name args 6308\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 6309 6310% @deftypeop category class type name args 6311\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6312 6313% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 6314\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6315 6316% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 6317% 6318\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6319 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6320 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6321} 6322 6323%%% Typed variables: 6324 6325% @deftypevr category type var args 6326\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 6327 6328% @deftypecv category class type var args 6329\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6330 6331% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 6332\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6333 6334% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 6335% 6336\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6337 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6338 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6339} 6340 6341%%% Untyped variables: 6342 6343% @defvr category var args 6344\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 6345 6346% @defcv category class var args 6347\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6348 6349% \defcvof {category of}class var args 6350\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 6351 6352%%% Type: 6353% @deftp category name args 6354\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 6355 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 6356 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 6357} 6358 6359% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 6360\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6361\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 6362\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 6363\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6364\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6365\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 6366\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6367\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 6368\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 6369\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6370\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6371 6372% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 6373% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 6374% #2 is the return type, if any. 6375% #3 is the function name. 6376% 6377% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 6378% 6379\def\defname#1#2#3{% 6380 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 6381 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 6382 % 6383 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps 6384 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 6385 % just below it. 6386 \def\temp{#1}% 6387 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 6388 % 6389 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. 6390 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 6391 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 6392 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 6393 % The continuations: 6394 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 6395 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) 6396 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 6397 % 6398 % Put the type name to the right margin. 6399 \noindent 6400 \hbox to 0pt{% 6401 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 6402 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 6403 \kern\leftskip 6404 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 6405 }% 6406 % 6407 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 6408 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 6409 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6410 {% 6411 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 6412 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 6413 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 6414 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 6415 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 6416 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 6417 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 6418 % one has made identifiers using them :). 6419 \df \tt 6420 \def\temp{#2}% return value type 6421 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi 6422 #3% output function name 6423 }% 6424 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm 6425 % 6426 \boldbrax 6427 % arguments will be output next, if any. 6428} 6429 6430% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 6431% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 6432% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 6433% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 6434% 6435\def\defunargs#1{% 6436 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 6437 % tt for the names. 6438 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 6439 % 6440 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 6441 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. 6442 \let\var=\ttslanted 6443 #1% 6444 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 6445} 6446 6447% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 6448% 6449\def\activeparens{% 6450 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 6451 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 6452 \catcode`\&=\active 6453} 6454 6455% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 6456\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 6457 6458% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 6459% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 6460% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 6461{ 6462 \activeparens 6463 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 6464 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 6465 \global\let& = \& 6466 6467 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 6468 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 6469} 6470 6471\newcount\parencount 6472 6473% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 6474\newif\ifampseen 6475\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 6476 6477\def\parenfont{% 6478 \ifampseen 6479 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 6480 % otherwise use the default font. 6481 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 6482 \else 6483 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 6484 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 6485 \sf 6486 \fi 6487} 6488\def\infirstlevel#1{% 6489 \ifampseen 6490 \ifnum\parencount=1 6491 #1% 6492 \fi 6493 \fi 6494} 6495\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 6496 6497\def\opnr{% 6498 \global\advance\parencount by 1 6499 {\parenfont(}% 6500 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 6501} 6502\def\clnr{% 6503 {\parenfont)}% 6504 \infirstlevel \sl 6505 \global\advance\parencount by -1 6506} 6507 6508\newcount\brackcount 6509\def\lbrb{% 6510 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 6511 {\bf[}% 6512} 6513\def\rbrb{% 6514 {\bf]}% 6515 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 6516} 6517 6518\def\checkparencounts{% 6519 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 6520 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 6521} 6522% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 6523% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 6524\def\badparencount{% 6525 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 6526 \global\parencount=0 6527} 6528\def\badbrackcount{% 6529 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 6530 \global\brackcount=0 6531} 6532 6533 6534\message{macros,} 6535% @macro. 6536 6537% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 6538% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 6539\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined 6540 \newwrite\macscribble 6541 \def\scantokens#1{% 6542 \toks0={#1}% 6543 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 6544 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 6545 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 6546 \input \jobname.tmp 6547 } 6548\fi 6549 6550\def\scanmacro#1{% 6551 \begingroup 6552 \newlinechar`\^^M 6553 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces 6554 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex 6555 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active 6556 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had 6557 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears 6558 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 6559 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ 6560 % ... and \example 6561 \spaceisspace 6562 % 6563 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. 6564 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX 6565 % --kasal, 29nov03 6566 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% 6567 \endgroup 6568} 6569 6570\def\scanexp#1{% 6571 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% 6572 \temp 6573} 6574 6575\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 6576\newtoks\macname % Macro name 6577\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 6578 6579% List of all defined macros in the form 6580% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... 6581% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 6582% if there is a need. 6583\def\macrolist{} 6584 6585% Add the macro to \macrolist 6586\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 6587\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 6588 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% 6589 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 6590} 6591 6592% Utility routines. 6593% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 6594% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 6595% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 6596% 6597\def\cslet#1#2{% 6598 \expandafter\let 6599 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 6600 \csname#2\endcsname 6601} 6602 6603% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 6604% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 6605{\catcode`\@=11 6606\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 6607\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 6608\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 6609\def\unbrace#1{#1} 6610\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 6611} 6612 6613% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 6614{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 6615\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 6616\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 6617\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 6618} 6619 6620% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 6621% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 6622% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. 6623 6624% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 6625% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 6626% confine the change to the current group. 6627 6628% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 6629% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 6630% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 6631 6632\def\scanctxt{% 6633 \catcode`\"=\other 6634 \catcode`\+=\other 6635 \catcode`\<=\other 6636 \catcode`\>=\other 6637 \catcode`\@=\other 6638 \catcode`\^=\other 6639 \catcode`\_=\other 6640 \catcode`\|=\other 6641 \catcode`\~=\other 6642 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi 6643} 6644 6645\def\scanargctxt{% 6646 \scanctxt 6647 \catcode`\\=\other 6648 \catcode`\^^M=\other 6649} 6650 6651\def\macrobodyctxt{% 6652 \scanctxt 6653 \catcode`\{=\other 6654 \catcode`\}=\other 6655 \catcode`\^^M=\other 6656 \usembodybackslash 6657} 6658 6659\def\macroargctxt{% 6660 \scanctxt 6661 \catcode`\\=\other 6662} 6663 6664% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 6665% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 6666% where N is the macro parameter number. 6667% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 6668% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 6669 6670{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 6671 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 6672 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 6673} 6674\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 6675 6676\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 6677\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 6678 6679\def\macroxxx#1{% 6680 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 6681 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 6682 \paramno=0% 6683 \else 6684 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 6685 \fi 6686 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 6687 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 6688 \else 6689 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 6690 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 6691 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 6692 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 6693 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 6694 \fi 6695 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 6696 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 6697 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 6698 \fi} 6699 6700\parseargdef\unmacro{% 6701 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 6702 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 6703 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 6704 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 6705 \begingroup 6706 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 6707 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo 6708 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 6709 \endgroup 6710 \else 6711 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 6712 \fi 6713} 6714 6715% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 6716% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 6717% 6718\def\unmacrodo#1{% 6719 \ifx #1\relax 6720 % remove this 6721 \else 6722 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% 6723 \fi 6724} 6725 6726% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a 6727% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 6728% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 6729\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 6730\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 6731\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 6732\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 6733 6734% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist 6735% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah 6736% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. 6737% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 6738 6739% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. 6740% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something 6741% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine 6742% it to # just before using the token list produced. 6743% 6744% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before 6745% the macro is used. 6746 6747\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 6748 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} 6749\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 6750 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 6751 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 6752 \advance\paramno by 1% 6753 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 6754 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 6755 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 6756 \fi\next} 6757 6758% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. 6759% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 6760 6761\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% 6762{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 6763\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% 6764{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 6765 6766% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and 6767% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. 6768% Much magic with \expandafter here. 6769% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 6770% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. 6771\def\defmacro{% 6772 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 6773 \ifrecursive 6774 \ifcase\paramno 6775 % 0 6776 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6777 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6778 \or % 1 6779 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6780 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6781 \noexpand\braceorline 6782 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 6783 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 6784 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6785 \else % many 6786 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6787 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6788 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 6789 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 6790 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 6791 \expandafter\expandafter 6792 \expandafter\xdef 6793 \expandafter\expandafter 6794 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 6795 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6796 \fi 6797 \else 6798 \ifcase\paramno 6799 % 0 6800 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6801 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6802 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6803 \or % 1 6804 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6805 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6806 \noexpand\braceorline 6807 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 6808 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 6809 \egroup 6810 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6811 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6812 \else % many 6813 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6814 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6815 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 6816 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 6817 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 6818 \expandafter\expandafter 6819 \expandafter\xdef 6820 \expandafter\expandafter 6821 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 6822 \paramlist{% 6823 \egroup 6824 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6825 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6826 \fi 6827 \fi} 6828 6829\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 6830 6831% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a 6832% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole 6833% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence 6834% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) 6835\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 6836\def\braceorlinexxx{% 6837 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else 6838 \expandafter\parsearg 6839 \fi \macnamexxx} 6840 6841 6842% @alias. 6843% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 6844% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 6845\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 6846\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 6847\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 6848 {% 6849 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 6850 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 6851 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 6852 }% 6853 \next 6854} 6855 6856 6857\message{cross references,} 6858 6859\newwrite\auxfile 6860\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 6861\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 6862 6863% @inforef is relatively simple. 6864\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 6865\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 6866 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 6867 6868% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 6869% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 6870% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 6871% @node foo , bar , ... 6872% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 6873% 6874\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 6875% 6876% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 6877% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 6878\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 6879\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 6880 6881\let\nwnode=\node 6882\let\lastnode=\empty 6883 6884% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 6885% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 6886% 6887\def\donoderef#1{% 6888 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 6889 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 6890 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 6891 \fi 6892} 6893 6894% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 6895% 6896\newcount\savesfregister 6897% 6898\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 6899\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 6900\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 6901 6902% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 6903% anchor), which consists of three parts: 6904% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 6905% or the anchor name. 6906% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 6907% empty for anchors. 6908% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 6909% 6910% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 6911% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 6912% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 6913% 6914\def\setref#1#2{% 6915 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 6916 \iflinks 6917 {% 6918 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 6919 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 6920 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 6921 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 6922 }% 6923 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 6924 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 6925 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 6926 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout 6927 }% 6928 \fi 6929} 6930 6931% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 6932% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 6933% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 6934% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 6935% 6936\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6937\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6938\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6939\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 6940 \unsepspaces 6941 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 6942 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 6943 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 6944 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 6945 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt 6946 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 6947 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax 6948 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. 6949 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6950 \else 6951 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside 6952 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. 6953 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 6954 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. 6955 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6956 \else 6957 \ifhavexrefs 6958 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. 6959 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 6960 \else 6961 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 6962 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6963 \fi% 6964 \fi 6965 \fi 6966 \fi 6967 % 6968 % Make link in pdf output. 6969 \ifpdf 6970 {\indexnofonts 6971 \turnoffactive 6972 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 6973 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. 6974 \getfilename{#4}% 6975 % 6976 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. 6977 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% 6978 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% 6979 % 6980 \leavevmode 6981 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 6982 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 6983 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% 6984 \else 6985 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% 6986 \fi 6987 }% 6988 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 6989 \fi 6990 % 6991 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 6992 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the 6993 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. 6994 {% 6995 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 6996 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 6997 \indexnofonts 6998 \turnoffactive 6999 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 7000 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 7001 }% 7002 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 7003 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 7004 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 7005 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt 7006 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 7007 \else 7008 \printedrefname 7009 \fi 7010 % 7011 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 7012 % "in MANUALNAME". 7013 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 7014 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 7015 \fi 7016 \else 7017 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 7018 % 7019 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not 7020 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will 7021 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 7022 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this 7023 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it 7024 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 7025 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 7026 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 7027 \else 7028 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 7029 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 7030 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 7031 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 7032 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 7033 {\turnoffactive 7034 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 7035 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 7036 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 7037 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 7038 }% 7039 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. 7040 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 7041 % 7042 % But we always want a comma and a space: 7043 ,\space 7044 % 7045 % output the `page 3'. 7046 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 7047 \fi 7048 \fi 7049 \endlink 7050\endgroup} 7051 7052% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 7053% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 7054% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 7055% one that Bob is working on :). 7056% 7057\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 7058 7059% Things referred to by \setref. 7060% 7061\def\Ynothing{} 7062\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 7063\def\Ynumbered{% 7064 \ifnum\secno=0 7065 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 7066 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 7067 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 7068 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 7069 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 7070 \else 7071 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 7072 \fi\fi\fi 7073} 7074\def\Yappendix{% 7075 \ifnum\secno=0 7076 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 7077 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 7078 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 7079 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 7080 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 7081 \else 7082 \putwordSection@tie 7083 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 7084 \fi\fi\fi 7085} 7086 7087% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 7088% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. 7089% 7090\def\refx#1#2{% 7091 {% 7092 \indexnofonts 7093 \otherbackslash 7094 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 7095 \csname XR#1\endcsname 7096 }% 7097 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 7098 % If not defined, say something at least. 7099 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 7100 \iflinks 7101 \ifhavexrefs 7102 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% 7103 \else 7104 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 7105 \global\warnedxrefstrue 7106 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 7107 \fi 7108 \fi 7109 \fi 7110 \else 7111 % It's defined, so just use it. 7112 \thisrefX 7113 \fi 7114 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 7115} 7116 7117% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's 7118% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid 7119% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. 7120% 7121\def\xrdef#1#2{% 7122 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current 7123 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these 7124 % mess up the control sequence name. 7125 \indexnofonts 7126 \turnoffactive 7127 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 7128 }% 7129 % 7130 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref 7131 % 7132 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 7133 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 7134 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 7135 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 7136 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 7137 % 7138 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 7139 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 7140 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 7141 \else 7142 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 7143 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 7144 \fi 7145 % 7146 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 7147 % for later use in \listoffloats. 7148 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 7149 {\safexrefname}}% 7150 \fi 7151} 7152 7153% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 7154% 7155\def\tryauxfile{% 7156 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 7157 \ifeof 1 \else 7158 \readdatafile{aux}% 7159 \global\havexrefstrue 7160 \fi 7161 \closein 1 7162} 7163 7164\def\setupdatafile{% 7165 \catcode`\^^@=\other 7166 \catcode`\^^A=\other 7167 \catcode`\^^B=\other 7168 \catcode`\^^C=\other 7169 \catcode`\^^D=\other 7170 \catcode`\^^E=\other 7171 \catcode`\^^F=\other 7172 \catcode`\^^G=\other 7173 \catcode`\^^H=\other 7174 \catcode`\^^K=\other 7175 \catcode`\^^L=\other 7176 \catcode`\^^N=\other 7177 \catcode`\^^P=\other 7178 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 7179 \catcode`\^^R=\other 7180 \catcode`\^^S=\other 7181 \catcode`\^^T=\other 7182 \catcode`\^^U=\other 7183 \catcode`\^^V=\other 7184 \catcode`\^^W=\other 7185 \catcode`\^^X=\other 7186 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 7187 \catcode`\^^[=\other 7188 \catcode`\^^\=\other 7189 \catcode`\^^]=\other 7190 \catcode`\^^^=\other 7191 \catcode`\^^_=\other 7192 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 7193 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 7194 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 7195 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 7196 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 7197 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 7198 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 7199 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 7200 % 7201 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 7202 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 7203 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 7204 % 7205 \catcode`\^=\other 7206 % 7207 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 7208 \catcode`\~=\other 7209 \catcode`\[=\other 7210 \catcode`\]=\other 7211 \catcode`\"=\other 7212 \catcode`\_=\other 7213 \catcode`\|=\other 7214 \catcode`\<=\other 7215 \catcode`\>=\other 7216 \catcode`\$=\other 7217 \catcode`\#=\other 7218 \catcode`\&=\other 7219 \catcode`\%=\other 7220 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 7221 % 7222 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 7223 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 7224 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 7225 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 7226 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 7227 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 7228 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 7229 \catcode`\\=\other 7230 % 7231 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. 7232 {% 7233 \count1=128 7234 \def\loop{% 7235 \catcode\count1=\other 7236 \advance\count1 by 1 7237 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi 7238 }% 7239 }% 7240 % 7241 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 7242 \catcode`\{=1 7243 \catcode`\}=2 7244 \catcode`\@=0 7245} 7246 7247\def\readdatafile#1{% 7248\begingroup 7249 \setupdatafile 7250 \input\jobname.#1 7251\endgroup} 7252 7253 7254\message{insertions,} 7255% including footnotes. 7256 7257\newcount \footnoteno 7258 7259% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 7260% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 7261% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 7262% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 7263% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 7264\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 7265 7266% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. 7267\let\footnotestyle=\comment 7268 7269{\catcode `\@=11 7270% 7271% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 7272\gdef\footnote{% 7273 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7274 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7275 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 7276 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 7277 % 7278 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 7279 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 7280 \let\@sf\empty 7281 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 7282 % 7283 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 7284 \unskip 7285 \thisfootno\@sf 7286 \dofootnote 7287}% 7288 7289% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 7290% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 7291% 7292% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 7293% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 7294% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 7295% 7296\gdef\dofootnote{% 7297 \insert\footins\bgroup 7298 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 7299 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 7300 % So reset some parameters. 7301 \hsize=\pagewidth 7302 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 7303 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 7304 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 7305 \floatingpenalty\@MM 7306 \leftskip\z@skip 7307 \rightskip\z@skip 7308 \spaceskip\z@skip 7309 \xspaceskip\z@skip 7310 \parindent\defaultparindent 7311 % 7312 \smallfonts \rm 7313 % 7314 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 7315 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 7316 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 7317 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 7318 \let\noindent = \relax 7319 % 7320 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 7321 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 7322 \everypar = {\hang}% 7323 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 7324 % 7325 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 7326 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 7327 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 7328 \footstrut 7329 \futurelet\next\fo@t 7330} 7331}%end \catcode `\@=11 7332 7333% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 7334% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 7335% would be lost. 7336% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 7337% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 7338% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 7339 7340% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 7341% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 7342% out prematurely. 7343% 7344\def\startsavinginserts{% 7345 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 7346 \let\insert\saveinsert 7347 \else 7348 \let\checkinserts\relax 7349 \fi 7350} 7351 7352% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 7353% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 7354% 7355\def\saveinsert#1{% 7356 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 7357 \afterassignment\next 7358 % swallow the left brace 7359 \let\temp = 7360} 7361\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 7362\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 7363 7364\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 7365 7366\def\placesaveins#1{% 7367 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 7368 {\box#1}% 7369} 7370 7371% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 7372{ 7373 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 7374 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 7375} 7376 7377% initialization: 7378\def\newsaveins #1{% 7379 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 7380 \next 7381} 7382\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 7383 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 7384 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 7385 \checksaveins #1}% 7386} 7387 7388% initialize: 7389\let\checkinserts\empty 7390\newsaveins\footins 7391\newsaveins\margin 7392 7393 7394% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 7395% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 7396% 7397% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 7398% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 7399% undone and the next image would fail. 7400\openin 1 = epsf.tex 7401\ifeof 1 \else 7402 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 7403 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 7404 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 7405 \input epsf.tex 7406\fi 7407\closein 1 7408% 7409% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 7410\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 7411\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 7412 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 7413 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 7414% 7415\def\image#1{% 7416 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined 7417 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 7418 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 7419 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 7420 \global\warnednoepsftrue 7421 \fi 7422 \else 7423 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 7424 \fi 7425} 7426% 7427% Arguments to @image: 7428% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 7429% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 7430% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 7431% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 7432% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. 7433\newif\ifimagevmode 7434\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 7435 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 7436 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 7437 % If the image is by itself, center it. 7438 \ifvmode 7439 \imagevmodetrue 7440 \nobreak\bigskip 7441 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 7442 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 7443 % above and below. 7444 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 7445 \nobreak 7446 \line\bgroup 7447 \fi 7448 % 7449 % Output the image. 7450 \ifpdf 7451 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 7452 \else 7453 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 7454 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 7455 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 7456 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 7457 \fi 7458 % 7459 \ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image 7460\endgroup} 7461 7462 7463% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 7464% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 7465% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 7466% 7467\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 7468 7469% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 7470\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 7471 7472% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 7473% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 7474% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 7475% 7476% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 7477% be referable. 7478% 7479% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 7480% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 7481% 7482% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 7483% chapter-level command. 7484\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 7485% 7486\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 7487 \let\thiscaption=\empty 7488 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 7489 % 7490 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 7491 % 7492 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 7493 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 7494 % 7495 \startsavinginserts 7496 % 7497 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 7498 \par 7499 % 7500 \vtop\bgroup 7501 \def\floattype{#1}% 7502 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 7503 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 7504 % 7505 \ifx\floattype\empty 7506 \let\safefloattype=\empty 7507 \else 7508 {% 7509 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 7510 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 7511 \indexnofonts 7512 \turnoffactive 7513 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 7514 }% 7515 \fi 7516 % 7517 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 7518 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7519 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 7520 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 7521 % 7522 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 7523 \global\advance\floatno by 1 7524 % 7525 {% 7526 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 7527 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 7528 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 7529 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 7530 % lists of floats. 7531 % 7532 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 7533 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 7534 }% 7535 \fi 7536 % 7537 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 7538 \vskip\parskip 7539 % 7540 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 7541 \restorefirstparagraphindent 7542} 7543 7544% we have these possibilities: 7545% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 7546% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 7547% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 7548% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 7549% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 7550% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 7551% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 7552% @float & no caption: 7553% 7554\def\Efloat{% 7555 \let\floatident = \empty 7556 % 7557 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 7558 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 7559 % 7560 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 7561 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7562 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 7563 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 7564 \fi 7565 % the number. 7566 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 7567 \fi 7568 % 7569 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 7570 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 7571 \let\captionline = \floatident 7572 % 7573 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 7574 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 7575 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 7576 \fi 7577 % 7578 % caption text. 7579 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 7580 \fi 7581 % 7582 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 7583 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 7584 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 7585 \vskip.5\parskip 7586 \captionline 7587 % 7588 % Space below caption. 7589 \vskip\parskip 7590 \fi 7591 % 7592 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 7593 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 7594 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7595 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 7596 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 7597 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 7598 {% 7599 \atdummies 7600 % 7601 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M 7602 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so 7603 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. 7604 \scanexp{% 7605 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% 7606 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 7607 \thiscaption 7608 \else 7609 \thisshortcaption 7610 \fi 7611 }% 7612 }% 7613 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 7614 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 7615 }% 7616 \fi 7617 \egroup % end of \vtop 7618 % 7619 % place the captured inserts 7620 % 7621 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning 7622 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly 7623 % float. --kasal, 26may04 7624 % 7625 \checkinserts 7626} 7627 7628% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 7629% 7630\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 7631 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 7632} 7633 7634% @caption, @shortcaption 7635% 7636\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 7637\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 7638\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 7639\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 7640 7641% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 7642% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 7643\def\getfloatno#1{% 7644 \ifx#1\relax 7645 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 7646 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 7647 % 7648 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 7649 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 7650 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 7651 \fi 7652 \let\floatno#1% 7653} 7654 7655% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 7656% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 7657% first read the @float command. 7658% 7659\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 7660 7661% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 7662% distinguish floats from other xref types. 7663\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 7664 7665% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 7666% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 7667% \lastsection value which we \setref above. 7668% 7669\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 7670% 7671% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 7672% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 7673% 7674\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 7675 \def\temp{#1}% 7676 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 7677 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 7678} 7679 7680% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 7681% 7682\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 7683 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 7684 {% 7685 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 7686 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 7687 \indexnofonts 7688 \turnoffactive 7689 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 7690 }% 7691 % 7692 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 7693 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 7694 \ifhavexrefs 7695 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 7696 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 7697 \fi 7698 \else 7699 \begingroup 7700 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 7701 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 7702 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 7703 \endgroup 7704 \fi 7705} 7706 7707% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 7708% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 7709% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 7710% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 7711% 7712% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 7713% they won't appear in the aux file). 7714% 7715\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 7716\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 7717 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 7718 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 7719 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 7720 % in pdf output. 7721 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 7722 % 7723 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 7724 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 7725 \writeentry 7726}} 7727 7728 7729\message{localization,} 7730 7731% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after 7732% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything 7733% properly. Single argument is the language (de) or locale (de_DE) 7734% abbreviation. It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file. 7735% 7736{ 7737 \catcode`\_ = \active 7738 \globaldefs=1 7739\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup 7740 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames 7741 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 7742 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 7743 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 7744 \ifeof 1 7745 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% 7746 \else 7747 \input txi-#1.tex 7748 \fi 7749 \closein 1 7750 \endgroup 7751\endgroup} 7752} 7753% 7754% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 7755% try txi-de.tex. 7756% 7757\def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 7758 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 7759 \ifeof 1 7760 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 7761 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 7762 \else 7763 \input txi-#1.tex 7764 \fi 7765 \closein 1 7766} 7767% 7768\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 7769is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory 7770should work if nowhere else does.} 7771 7772% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 7773% 7774\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 7775 \count255=128 7776 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 7777 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 7778 \advance\count255 by 1 7779 \repeat 7780} 7781 7782\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 7783 \count255=128 7784 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 7785 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 7786 \advance\count255 by 1 7787 \repeat 7788} 7789 7790% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 7791% according to the specified encoding. 7792% 7793\parseargdef\documentencoding{% 7794 % Encoding being declared for the document. 7795 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 7796 % 7797 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 7798 % to compare them with \ifx. 7799 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 7800 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 7801 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 7802 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 7803 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 7804 % 7805 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 7806 \asciichardefs 7807 % 7808 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 7809 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7810 \lattwochardefs 7811 % 7812 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 7813 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7814 \latonechardefs 7815 % 7816 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 7817 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7818 \latninechardefs 7819 % 7820 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 7821 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7822 \utfeightchardefs 7823 % 7824 \else 7825 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% 7826 % 7827 \fi % utfeight 7828 \fi % latnine 7829 \fi % latone 7830 \fi % lattwo 7831 \fi % ascii 7832} 7833 7834% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 7835% the default font encoding (OT1). 7836% 7837\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} 7838 7839% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 7840\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 7841 7842% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 7843% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 7844% macros containing the character definitions. 7845\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7846% 7847% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 7848\def\latonechardefs{% 7849 \gdef^^a0{~} 7850 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} 7851 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} 7852 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} 7853 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 7854 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} 7855 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} 7856 \gdef^^a7{\S} 7857 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 7858 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} 7859 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} 7860 \gdef^^ab{\missingcharmsg{LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} 7861 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} 7862 \gdef^^ad{\-} 7863 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} 7864 \gdef^^af{\={}} 7865 % 7866 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 7867 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} 7868 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} 7869 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} 7870 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 7871 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} 7872 \gdef^^b6{\P} 7873 % 7874 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} 7875 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 7876 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} 7877 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} 7878 % 7879 \gdef^^bb{\missingcharmsg{RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} 7880 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} 7881 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} 7882 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} 7883 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} 7884 % 7885 \gdef^^c0{\`A} 7886 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 7887 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 7888 \gdef^^c3{\~A} 7889 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 7890 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} 7891 \gdef^^c6{\AE} 7892 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 7893 \gdef^^c8{\`E} 7894 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 7895 \gdef^^ca{\^E} 7896 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 7897 \gdef^^cc{\`I} 7898 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 7899 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 7900 \gdef^^cf{\"I} 7901 % 7902 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}} 7903 \gdef^^d1{\~N} 7904 \gdef^^d2{\`O} 7905 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 7906 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 7907 \gdef^^d5{\~O} 7908 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 7909 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 7910 \gdef^^d8{\O} 7911 \gdef^^d9{\`U} 7912 \gdef^^da{\'U} 7913 \gdef^^db{\^U} 7914 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 7915 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 7916 \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}} 7917 \gdef^^df{\ss} 7918 % 7919 \gdef^^e0{\`a} 7920 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 7921 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 7922 \gdef^^e3{\~a} 7923 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 7924 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} 7925 \gdef^^e6{\ae} 7926 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 7927 \gdef^^e8{\`e} 7928 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 7929 \gdef^^ea{\^e} 7930 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 7931 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 7932 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 7933 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 7934 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 7935 % 7936 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}} 7937 \gdef^^f1{\~n} 7938 \gdef^^f2{\`o} 7939 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 7940 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 7941 \gdef^^f5{\~o} 7942 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 7943 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 7944 \gdef^^f8{\o} 7945 \gdef^^f9{\`u} 7946 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 7947 \gdef^^fb{\^u} 7948 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 7949 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 7950 \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}} 7951 \gdef^^ff{\"y} 7952} 7953 7954% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 7955\def\latninechardefs{% 7956 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 7957 \latonechardefs 7958 % 7959 \gdef^^a4{\euro} 7960 \gdef^^a6{\v S} 7961 \gdef^^a8{\v s} 7962 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} 7963 \gdef^^b8{\v z} 7964 \gdef^^bc{\OE} 7965 \gdef^^bd{\oe} 7966 \gdef^^be{\"Y} 7967} 7968 7969% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 7970\def\lattwochardefs{% 7971 \gdef^^a0{~} 7972 \gdef^^a1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}} 7973 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} 7974 \gdef^^a3{\L} 7975 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 7976 \gdef^^a5{\v L} 7977 \gdef^^a6{\'S} 7978 \gdef^^a7{\S} 7979 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 7980 \gdef^^a9{\v S} 7981 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} 7982 \gdef^^ab{\v T} 7983 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} 7984 \gdef^^ad{\-} 7985 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} 7986 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} 7987 % 7988 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 7989 \gdef^^b1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}} 7990 \gdef^^b2{\missingcharmsg{OGONEK}} 7991 \gdef^^b3{\l} 7992 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 7993 \gdef^^b5{\v l} 7994 \gdef^^b6{\'s} 7995 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} 7996 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 7997 \gdef^^b9{\v s} 7998 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} 7999 \gdef^^bb{\v t} 8000 \gdef^^bc{\'z} 8001 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} 8002 \gdef^^be{\v z} 8003 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} 8004 % 8005 \gdef^^c0{\'R} 8006 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 8007 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 8008 \gdef^^c3{\u A} 8009 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 8010 \gdef^^c5{\'L} 8011 \gdef^^c6{\'C} 8012 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 8013 \gdef^^c8{\v C} 8014 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 8015 \gdef^^ca{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}} 8016 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 8017 \gdef^^cc{\v E} 8018 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 8019 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 8020 \gdef^^cf{\v D} 8021 % 8022 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} 8023 \gdef^^d1{\'N} 8024 \gdef^^d2{\v N} 8025 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 8026 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 8027 \gdef^^d5{\H O} 8028 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 8029 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 8030 \gdef^^d8{\v R} 8031 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} 8032 \gdef^^da{\'U} 8033 \gdef^^db{\H U} 8034 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 8035 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 8036 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} 8037 \gdef^^df{\ss} 8038 % 8039 \gdef^^e0{\'r} 8040 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 8041 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 8042 \gdef^^e3{\u a} 8043 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 8044 \gdef^^e5{\'l} 8045 \gdef^^e6{\'c} 8046 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 8047 \gdef^^e8{\v c} 8048 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 8049 \gdef^^ea{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}} 8050 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 8051 \gdef^^ec{\v e} 8052 \gdef^^ed{\'\i} 8053 \gdef^^ee{\^\i} 8054 \gdef^^ef{\v d} 8055 % 8056 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} 8057 \gdef^^f1{\'n} 8058 \gdef^^f2{\v n} 8059 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 8060 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 8061 \gdef^^f5{\H o} 8062 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 8063 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 8064 \gdef^^f8{\v r} 8065 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} 8066 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 8067 \gdef^^fb{\H u} 8068 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 8069 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 8070 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} 8071 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 8072} 8073 8074% UTF-8 character definitions. 8075% 8076% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 8077% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 8078% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 8079% 8080\newcount\countUTFx 8081\newcount\countUTFy 8082\newcount\countUTFz 8083 8084\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 8085 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 8086% 8087\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 8088 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 8089% 8090\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 8091 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 8092 8093\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 8094 \ifx #1\relax 8095 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 8096 \else 8097 \expandafter #1% 8098 \fi 8099} 8100 8101\begingroup 8102 \catcode`\~13 8103 \catcode`\"12 8104 8105 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 8106 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 8107 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 8108 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 8109 \advance\countUTFx by 1 8110 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 8111 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 8112 \fi} 8113 8114 \countUTFx = "C2 8115 \countUTFy = "E0 8116 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8117 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} 8118 \UTFviiiLoop 8119 8120 \countUTFx = "E0 8121 \countUTFy = "F0 8122 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8123 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} 8124 \UTFviiiLoop 8125 8126 \countUTFx = "F0 8127 \countUTFy = "F4 8128 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8129 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} 8130 \UTFviiiLoop 8131\endgroup 8132 8133\begingroup 8134 \catcode`\"=12 8135 \catcode`\<=12 8136 \catcode`\.=12 8137 \catcode`\,=12 8138 \catcode`\;=12 8139 \catcode`\!=12 8140 \catcode`\~=13 8141 8142 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% 8143 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 8144 \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% 8145 \begingroup 8146 \parseXMLCharref 8147 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% 8148 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% 8149 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% 8150 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% 8151 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% 8152 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% 8153 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 8154 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 8155 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 8156 \endgroup} 8157 8158 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 8159 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 8160 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8161 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 8162 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 8163 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8164 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% 8165 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 8166 \parseUTFviiiA;% 8167 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8168 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% 8169 \else 8170 \parseUTFviiiA;% 8171 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8172 \parseUTFviiiA!% 8173 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% 8174 \fi\fi\fi 8175 } 8176 8177 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 8178 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 8179 \divide\countUTFz by 64 8180 \countUTFy = \countUTFz 8181 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 8182 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 8183 \advance\countUTFx by 128 8184 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 8185 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 8186 8187 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 8188 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 8189 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 8190 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 8191\endgroup 8192 8193\def\utfeightchardefs{% 8194 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} 8195 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} 8196 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} 8197 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} 8198 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} 8199 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} 8200 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} 8201 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} 8202 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} 8203 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} 8204 8205 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} 8206 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} 8207 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} 8208 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} 8209 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} 8210 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} 8211 8212 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} 8213 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} 8214 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} 8215 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} 8216 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} 8217 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} 8218 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} 8219 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} 8220 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} 8221 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} 8222 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} 8223 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} 8224 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} 8225 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} 8226 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} 8227 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} 8228 8229 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} 8230 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} 8231 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} 8232 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} 8233 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} 8234 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} 8235 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} 8236 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} 8237 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} 8238 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} 8239 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} 8240 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} 8241 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} 8242 8243 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} 8244 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} 8245 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} 8246 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} 8247 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} 8248 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} 8249 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} 8250 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} 8251 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} 8252 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} 8253 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} 8254 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} 8255 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} 8256 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} 8257 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} 8258 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} 8259 8260 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} 8261 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} 8262 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} 8263 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} 8264 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} 8265 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} 8266 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} 8267 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} 8268 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} 8269 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} 8270 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} 8271 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} 8272 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} 8273 8274 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} 8275 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} 8276 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} 8277 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} 8278 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} 8279 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} 8280 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} 8281 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} 8282 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} 8283 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} 8284 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} 8285 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} 8286 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} 8287 8288 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} 8289 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} 8290 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} 8291 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} 8292 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} 8293 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} 8294 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} 8295 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} 8296 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} 8297 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} 8298 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} 8299 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} 8300 8301 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} 8302 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} 8303 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} 8304 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} 8305 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} 8306 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} 8307 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} 8308 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} 8309 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} 8310 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} 8311 8312 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} 8313 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} 8314 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} 8315 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} 8316 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} 8317 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} 8318 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} 8319 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} 8320 8321 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} 8322 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} 8323 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} 8324 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} 8325 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} 8326 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} 8327 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} 8328 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} 8329 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} 8330 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} 8331 8332 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} 8333 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} 8334 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} 8335 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} 8336 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} 8337 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} 8338 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} 8339 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} 8340 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} 8341 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} 8342 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} 8343 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} 8344 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} 8345 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} 8346 8347 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} 8348 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} 8349 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} 8350 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} 8351 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} 8352 8353 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} 8354 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} 8355 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} 8356 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} 8357 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} 8358 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} 8359 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} 8360 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} 8361 8362 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} 8363 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} 8364 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} 8365 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} 8366 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} 8367 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} 8368 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} 8369 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} 8370 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} 8371 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} 8372 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} 8373 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} 8374 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} 8375 8376 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} 8377 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} 8378 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} 8379 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} 8380 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} 8381 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} 8382 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} 8383 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} 8384 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} 8385 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} 8386 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} 8387 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} 8388 8389 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} 8390 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} 8391 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} 8392 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} 8393 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} 8394 8395 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} 8396 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} 8397 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} 8398 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} 8399 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} 8400 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} 8401 8402 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} 8403 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} 8404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} 8405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} 8406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} 8407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} 8408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} 8409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} 8410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} 8411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} 8412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} 8413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} 8414 8415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} 8416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} 8417 8418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} 8419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} 8420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} 8421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} 8422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} 8423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} 8424 8425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} 8426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} 8427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} 8428 8429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} 8430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} 8431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} 8432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} 8433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} 8434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} 8435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} 8436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} 8437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} 8438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} 8439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} 8440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} 8441 8442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} 8443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} 8444 8445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} 8446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} 8447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} 8448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} 8449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} 8450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} 8451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} 8452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} 8453 8454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} 8455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} 8456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} 8457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} 8458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} 8459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} 8460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} 8461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} 8462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} 8463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} 8464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} 8465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} 8466 8467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} 8468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} 8469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} 8470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} 8471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} 8472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} 8473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} 8474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} 8475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} 8476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} 8477 8478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} 8479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} 8480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} 8481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} 8482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} 8483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} 8484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} 8485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} 8486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} 8487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} 8488 8489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} 8490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} 8491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} 8492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} 8493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} 8494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} 8495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} 8496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} 8497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} 8498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} 8499 8500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} 8501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} 8502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} 8503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} 8504 8505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} 8506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} 8507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} 8508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} 8509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} 8510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} 8511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} 8512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} 8513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} 8514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} 8515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} 8516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} 8517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} 8518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} 8519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} 8520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} 8521 8522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} 8523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} 8524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} 8525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} 8526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} 8527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} 8528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} 8529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} 8530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} 8531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} 8532 8533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} 8534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} 8535 8536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} 8537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} 8538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} 8539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} 8540 8541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} 8542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} 8543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} 8544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} 8545 8546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} 8547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} 8548 8549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} 8550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} 8551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} 8552 8553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} 8554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} 8555 8556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} 8557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} 8558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} 8559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} 8560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} 8561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} 8562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} 8563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} 8564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} 8565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} 8566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} 8567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} 8568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} 8569 8570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} 8571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} 8572 8573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} 8574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} 8575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} 8576}% end of \utfeightchardefs 8577 8578 8579% US-ASCII character definitions. 8580\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 8581 \relax 8582} 8583 8584% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 8585% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 8586% document encoding. 8587% 8588\setnonasciicharscatcode \other 8589 8590 8591\message{formatting,} 8592 8593\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 8594 8595\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 8596\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 8597\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 8598 8599% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 8600\vbadness = 10000 8601 8602% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 8603\hbadness = 2000 8604 8605% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 8606\widowpenalty=10000 8607\clubpenalty=10000 8608 8609% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 8610% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 8611% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 8612% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 8613% 8614\def\setemergencystretch{% 8615 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 8616 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 8617 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 8618 \else 8619 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 8620 \fi 8621} 8622 8623% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 8624% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 8625% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 8626% 8627% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 8628% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 8629% 8630\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 8631 \voffset = #3\relax 8632 \topskip = #6\relax 8633 \splittopskip = \topskip 8634 % 8635 \vsize = #1\relax 8636 \advance\vsize by \topskip 8637 \outervsize = \vsize 8638 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 8639 \pageheight = \vsize 8640 % 8641 \hsize = #2\relax 8642 \outerhsize = \hsize 8643 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 8644 \pagewidth = \hsize 8645 % 8646 \normaloffset = #4\relax 8647 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 8648 % 8649 \ifpdf 8650 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 8651 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 8652 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 8653 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 8654 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 8655 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 8656 \fi 8657 % 8658 \setleading{\textleading} 8659 % 8660 \parindent = \defaultparindent 8661 \setemergencystretch 8662} 8663 8664% @letterpaper (the default). 8665\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8666 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8667 \textleading = 13.2pt 8668 % 8669 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 8670 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 8671 {\voffset}{.25in}% 8672 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 8673 {11in}{8.5in}% 8674}} 8675 8676% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 8677\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 8678 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 8679 \textleading = 12pt 8680 % 8681 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 8682 {-.2in}{0in}% 8683 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 8684 {9.25in}{7in}% 8685 % 8686 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 8687 \tolerance = 700 8688 \hfuzz = 1pt 8689 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8690 \defbodyindent = .5cm 8691}} 8692 8693% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 8694% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 8695\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 8696 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 8697 \textleading = 12pt 8698 % 8699 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 8700 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 8701 {0pt}{14pt}% 8702 {9in}{6in}% 8703 % 8704 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 8705 \tolerance = 700 8706 \hfuzz = 1pt 8707 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8708 \defbodyindent = .4cm 8709}} 8710 8711% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 8712\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8713 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8714 \textleading = 13.2pt 8715 % 8716 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 8717 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 8718 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 8719 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 8720 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 8721 % your texinfo source file like this: 8722 % @tex 8723 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 8724 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 8725 % @end tex 8726 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 8727 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 8728 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 8729 {297mm}{210mm}% 8730 % 8731 \tolerance = 700 8732 \hfuzz = 1pt 8733 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8734 \defbodyindent = 5mm 8735}} 8736 8737% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 8738% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 8739% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 8740\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8741 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 8742 \textleading = 12.5pt 8743 % 8744 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 8745 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 8746 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 8747 {210mm}{148mm}% 8748 % 8749 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 8750 \tolerance = 800 8751 \hfuzz = 1.2pt 8752 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8753 \defbodyindent = 2mm 8754 \tableindent = 12mm 8755}} 8756 8757% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 8758\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 8759 \afourpaper 8760 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 8761 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 8762 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 8763 {297mm}{210mm}% 8764 % 8765 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 8766 \globaldefs = 0 8767}} 8768 8769% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 8770\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 8771 \afourpaper 8772 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 8773 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 8774 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 8775 {297mm}{210mm}% 8776 \globaldefs = 0 8777}} 8778 8779% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 8780% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 8781% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 8782% 8783\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 8784\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 8785 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 8786 \globaldefs = 1 8787 % 8788 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8789 \setleading{\textleading}% 8790 % 8791 \dimen0 = #1\relax 8792 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 8793 % 8794 \dimen2 = \hsize 8795 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 8796 % 8797 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 8798 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 8799 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 8800 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 8801}} 8802 8803% Set default to letter. 8804% 8805\letterpaper 8806 8807 8808\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 8809 8810% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 8811\catcode`\"=\other 8812\catcode`\~=\other 8813\catcode`\^=\other 8814\catcode`\_=\other 8815\catcode`\|=\other 8816\catcode`\<=\other 8817\catcode`\>=\other 8818\catcode`\+=\other 8819\catcode`\$=\other 8820\def\normaldoublequote{"} 8821\def\normaltilde{~} 8822\def\normalcaret{^} 8823\def\normalunderscore{_} 8824\def\normalverticalbar{|} 8825\def\normalless{<} 8826\def\normalgreater{>} 8827\def\normalplus{+} 8828\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 8829 8830% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 8831% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 8832% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 8833% 8834% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 8835% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 8836% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 8837% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 8838% 8839\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 8840 8841% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 8842% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 8843% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 8844% this is not a problem. 8845\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 8846 8847% Turn off all special characters except @ 8848% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). 8849% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 8850% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 8851 8852\catcode`\"=\active 8853\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 8854\let"=\activedoublequote 8855\catcode`\~=\active 8856\def~{{\tt\char126}} 8857\chardef\hat=`\^ 8858\catcode`\^=\active 8859\def^{{\tt \hat}} 8860 8861\catcode`\_=\active 8862\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 8863\let\realunder=_ 8864% Subroutine for the previous macro. 8865\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 8866 8867\catcode`\|=\active 8868\def|{{\tt\char124}} 8869\chardef \less=`\< 8870\catcode`\<=\active 8871\def<{{\tt \less}} 8872\chardef \gtr=`\> 8873\catcode`\>=\active 8874\def>{{\tt \gtr}} 8875\catcode`\+=\active 8876\def+{{\tt \char 43}} 8877\catcode`\$=\active 8878\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 8879 8880% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 8881% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 8882% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. 8883% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. 8884\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} 8885 8886% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 8887% parsing them. 8888\def\turnoffactive{% 8889 \normalturnoffactive 8890 \otherbackslash 8891} 8892 8893\catcode`\@=0 8894 8895% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 8896% as in \char`\\. 8897\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 8898\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 8899 8900% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 8901% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 8902{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 8903 8904% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 8905% in fixed width font. 8906\catcode`\\=\active 8907@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} 8908% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: 8909% @let \ = @normalbackslash 8910 8911% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 8912% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 8913% catcode other. 8914@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 8915@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 8916 8917% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 8918% the literal character `\'. 8919% 8920@def@normalturnoffactive{% 8921 @let\=@normalbackslash 8922 @let"=@normaldoublequote 8923 @let~=@normaltilde 8924 @let^=@normalcaret 8925 @let_=@normalunderscore 8926 @let|=@normalverticalbar 8927 @let<=@normalless 8928 @let>=@normalgreater 8929 @let+=@normalplus 8930 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 8931 @unsepspaces 8932} 8933 8934% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. 8935% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. 8936@otherifyactive 8937 8938% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 8939% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 8940% a backslash. 8941% 8942@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} 8943@global@let\ = @eatinput 8944 8945% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then 8946% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix 8947% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. 8948% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 8949% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 8950% 8951@gdef@fixbackslash{% 8952 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi 8953 @catcode`+=@active 8954 @catcode`@_=@active 8955} 8956 8957% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 8958@escapechar = `@@ 8959 8960% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 8961@catcode`@& = @other 8962@catcode`@# = @other 8963@catcode`@% = @other 8964 8965 8966@c Local variables: 8967@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 8968@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" 8969@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 8970@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 8971@c time-stamp-end: "}" 8972@c End: 8973 8974@c vim:sw=2: 8975 8976@ignore 8977 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 8978@end ignore 8979